US20080221154A1 - Hiv-integrase inhibitors, pharmaceutical compositions, and methods for their use - Google Patents

Hiv-integrase inhibitors, pharmaceutical compositions, and methods for their use Download PDF

Info

Publication number
US20080221154A1
US20080221154A1 US12/043,636 US4363608A US2008221154A1 US 20080221154 A1 US20080221154 A1 US 20080221154A1 US 4363608 A US4363608 A US 4363608A US 2008221154 A1 US2008221154 A1 US 2008221154A1
Authority
US
United States
Prior art keywords
pyridine
carboxamide
pyrrolo
hydroxy
difluorobenzyl
Prior art date
Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
Abandoned
Application number
US12/043,636
Inventor
Qiyue Hu
Ted William Johnson
Atsuo Kuki
Michael Bruno Plewe
Dawn Marie Nowlin
Hai Wang
Junhu Zhang
Current Assignee (The listed assignees may be inaccurate. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation or warranty as to the accuracy of the list.)
Pfizer Inc
Original Assignee
Pfizer Inc
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by Pfizer Inc filed Critical Pfizer Inc
Priority to US12/043,636 priority Critical patent/US20080221154A1/en
Publication of US20080221154A1 publication Critical patent/US20080221154A1/en
Abandoned legal-status Critical Current

Links

Classifications

    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07DHETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D471/00Heterocyclic compounds containing nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms in the condensed system, at least one ring being a six-membered ring with one nitrogen atom, not provided for by groups C07D451/00 - C07D463/00
    • C07D471/02Heterocyclic compounds containing nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms in the condensed system, at least one ring being a six-membered ring with one nitrogen atom, not provided for by groups C07D451/00 - C07D463/00 in which the condensed system contains two hetero rings
    • C07D471/04Ortho-condensed systems
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61PSPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P31/00Antiinfectives, i.e. antibiotics, antiseptics, chemotherapeutics
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61PSPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P31/00Antiinfectives, i.e. antibiotics, antiseptics, chemotherapeutics
    • A61P31/12Antivirals
    • A61P31/14Antivirals for RNA viruses
    • A61P31/18Antivirals for RNA viruses for HIV
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61PSPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P43/00Drugs for specific purposes, not provided for in groups A61P1/00-A61P41/00
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07DHETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D471/00Heterocyclic compounds containing nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms in the condensed system, at least one ring being a six-membered ring with one nitrogen atom, not provided for by groups C07D451/00 - C07D463/00
    • C07D471/12Heterocyclic compounds containing nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms in the condensed system, at least one ring being a six-membered ring with one nitrogen atom, not provided for by groups C07D451/00 - C07D463/00 in which the condensed system contains three hetero rings
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07DHETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D471/00Heterocyclic compounds containing nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms in the condensed system, at least one ring being a six-membered ring with one nitrogen atom, not provided for by groups C07D451/00 - C07D463/00
    • C07D471/12Heterocyclic compounds containing nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms in the condensed system, at least one ring being a six-membered ring with one nitrogen atom, not provided for by groups C07D451/00 - C07D463/00 in which the condensed system contains three hetero rings
    • C07D471/14Ortho-condensed systems

Definitions

  • the present invention is directed to bicyclic hydroxamates and pharmaceutically acceptable salts, pharmaceutically acceptable prodrugs, and pharmaceutically acceptable metabolites thereof, their synthesis, and their use as modulators or inhibitors of the HIV integrase enzyme.
  • the compounds of the present invention are useful for modulating (e.g. inhibiting) an enzyme activity of HIV Integrase enzyme and for treating diseases or conditions mediated by human immunodeficiency virus (“HIV”), such as for example, acquired immunodeficiency syndrome (“AIDS”), and AIDS related complex (“ARC”).
  • HIV human immunodeficiency virus
  • AIDS acquired immunodeficiency syndrome
  • ARC AIDS related complex
  • HIV human immunodeficiency virus
  • AIDS and other HIV-caused diseases are difficult to treat due to the ability of HIV to rapidly replicate, mutate and acquire resistance to drugs.
  • treatment of AIDS and other HIV-caused diseases has focused on inhibiting HIV replication.
  • HIV Since HIV is a retrovirus, and thus, encodes a positive-sense RNA strand, its mechanism of replication is based on the conversion of viral RNA to viral DNA, and subsequent insertion of the viral DNA into the host cell genome. HIV replication relies on three constitutive HIV encoded enzymes: reverse transcriptase (RT), protease and integrase.
  • RT reverse transcriptase
  • protease protease
  • integrase integrase
  • the retroviral core particles Upon infection with HIV, the retroviral core particles bind to specific cellular receptors and gain entry into the host cell cytoplasm. Once inside the cytoplasm, viral RT catalyzes the reverse transcription of viral ssRNA to form viral RNA-DNA hybrids. The RNA strand from the hybrid is then partially degraded and a second DNA strand is synthesized resulting in viral dsDNA. Integrase, aided by viral and cellular proteins, then transports the viral dsDNA into the host cell nucleus as a component of the pre-integration complex (PIC).
  • PIC pre-integration complex
  • integrase provides the permanent attachment, i.e., integration, of the viral dsDNA to the host cell genome which, in turn, provides viral access to the host cellular machinery for gene expression.
  • transcription and translation produce viral precursor proteins.
  • Protease then cleaves the viral precursor proteins into viral proteins which, after additional processing, are released from the host cell as newly infectious HIV particles.
  • a key step in HIV replication, insertion of the viral dsDNA into the host cell genome, is believed to be mediated by integrase in at least three, and possibly, four, steps: (1) assembly of proviral DNA; (2) 3′-end processing causing assembly of the PIC; (3) 3′-end joining or DNA strand transfer, i.e., integration; and (4) gap filling, a repair function.
  • integrase in at least three, and possibly, four, steps: (1) assembly of proviral DNA; (2) 3′-end processing causing assembly of the PIC; (3) 3′-end joining or DNA strand transfer, i.e., integration; and (4) gap filling, a repair function.
  • integrase forms a stable complex with the viral long terminal repeat (LTR) regions.
  • LTR long terminal repeat
  • integrase then performs an endonucleolytic processing step whereby the terminal GT dinucleotides of the 3′ ends (immediately downstream from a conserved CA dinucleotide) of both DNA strands are cleaved.
  • the processed DNA/integrase complex (the PIC) then translocates across the nuclear membrane.
  • integrase performs the third step, 3′-end joining, whereby a cut is made in the host cell DNA to covalently join the processed 3′-ends of the viral processed DNA during two transesterification reactions.
  • cellular enzymes repair the resultant gap at the site of viral DNA Insertion.
  • the enzymes, if any, employed in the repair process have not been accurately identified.
  • the role that integrase plays in the gap filling function is not known.
  • AIDS and other HIV-caused disease are treated with an “HIV cocktail” containing multiple drugs including RT and protease inhibitors.
  • HIV cocktail multiple drugs including RT and protease inhibitors.
  • numerous side effects and the rapid emergence of drug resistance limit the ability of the RT and protease inhibitors to safely and effectively treat AIDS and other HIV-caused diseases.
  • integration, and thus integrase, a virally encoded enzyme with no mammalian counterpart is a logical alternative. See, e.g., Wai, J. S. et al., J. Med. Chem. 43:4923-4926 (2000); Grobler, J.
  • an integrase inhibitor it should inhibit the strand transfer integrase function. See, e.g., Young, S. D., Curr. Opin. Drug Disc . & Devel. 4(4): 402-410 (2001).
  • inventive agents disclosed herein are novel, potent and selective HIV-integrase inhibitors, and, more specifically, strand transfer inhibitors, with high antiviral activity and low toxicity.
  • the invention is directed to compounds represented by Formula I:
  • R 1 , R 2 and R 3 are each independently:
  • R 4 is hydrogen or an alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, heteroalkyl, or haloalkyl group, unsubstituted or substituted with —OR d where R d is an unsubstituted alkyl group;
  • R 5 is hydrogen or an alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, heteroalkyl, or haloalkyl group
  • R 6 is hydrogen or an alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, heteroalkyl, or haloalkyl group, unsubstituted or substituted with an aryl group;
  • R 7 is hydrogen or an alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, heteroalkyl, haloalkyl, aryl, cycloalkyl, heterocycloalkyl or heteroaryl group, unsubstituted or substituted with one or more substituents independently selected from the group consisting of:
  • X is C or N
  • Y is C or N
  • Z is C or N
  • R 1 is hydrogen or —C(O)OR c , where R c is an unsubstituted alkyl, unsubstituted alkenyl, or unsubstituted alkynyl group;
  • R 2 is hydrogen or an alkyl, alkenyl, or heteroalkyl group, unsubstituted or substituted with one or more substituents independently selected from the group consisting of:
  • R 3 is hydrogen or an alkyl, alkenyl, or heteroalkyl group, unsubstituted or substituted with one or more substituents independently selected from the group consisting of:
  • R 4 is hydrogen or an alkyl group, unsubstituted or substituted with —OR f , where R f is an unsubstituted alkyl group;
  • R 5 is hydrogen or an alkyl group
  • R 6 is hydrogen or an alkyl group unsubstituted or substituted with an aryl group
  • R 7 is hydrogen or an alkyl, alkenyl, or aryl group, unsubstituted or substituted with an aryl group, unsubstituted or substituted with one or more halogens;
  • X is C or N
  • Y is C
  • Z is C or N
  • the invention is directed to compounds of the Formula I:
  • R 1 is hydrogen or —C(O)O-ethyl
  • R 2 is hydrogen, methyl, ethyl, propyl, vinyl, allyl, or benzyl, unsubstituted or substituted with one or more substituents independently selected from the group consisting of:
  • R 3 is methyl, ethyl, butyl, or benzyl, unsubstituted or substituted with one or more substituents independently selected from the group consisting of:
  • R 4 is hydrogen, methyl or methoxymethyl
  • R 5 is hydrogen or methyl
  • R 6 is hydrogen, methyl, or benzyl
  • R 7 is hydrogen, methyl, benzyl, phenyl, allyl, or tert-butyl, unsubstituted or substituted with one or more halogens;
  • the invention is also directed to compounds having the Formula I:
  • R 1 is hydrogen or —C(O)O-ethyl
  • R 2 is selected from hydrogen; hydroxymethyl; methoxymethyl; ethoxymethyl; 2-phenylvinyl; 3-phenylprop-1-enyl; [(2-phenylvinyl)oxy]methyl; dimethylaminomethyl; benzyloxymethyl; 4-fluorobenzyl; 2-phenylvinyl; 2-phenylethyl; 3-phenylpropyl; 2-phenylethoxymethyl; [(phenylprop-2-enyl)oxy]methyl; [(3-phenylallyl)oxy]methyl; methyl; ethyl; and allyl;
  • R 3 is selected from hydrogen; 2,4-difluorobenzyl; 2,3-difluorobenzyl; 4-fluorobenzyl; 3-chloro-2,6-difluorobenzyl; 3-chloro-5-fluoro-2-hydroxybenzyl; 5-chloro-thiophen-2-ylmethyl; 3-chloro-2-fluorobenzyl; 2,3-dichlorobenzyl; 5-ethoxy-[1,2,3]thiadiazol-4-ylmethyl; 3-methyl-butyl; 2-cyclohexyl-ethyl; 2,4-difluoro-phenoxymethyl; 3,5-difluoro-2-hydroxybenzyl; 2-chloro-4-fluoro-phenoxymethyl; 3-chloro-5-fluoro-2-hydroxybenzyl; 4-fluoro-phenoxymethyl; 5-fluoro-2-hydroxy-benzyl; 2,3,4-trifluoro-phenoxymethyl; 3,4,5-trifluoro-2-hydroxybenzyl;
  • R 4 is hydrogen, methyl or methoxymethyl
  • R 5 is hydrogen or methyl
  • R 6 is hydrogen, methyl, or benzyl
  • R 7 is hydrogen, methyl, benzyl, phenyl, pentafluorobenzyl, allyl, tert-butyl;
  • Inventive compounds represented by the Formula I include, but are not limited to, the following compounds represented by Formula Ia, Ib, Ic and Ie:
  • the invention is also directed to pharmaceutically acceptable salts, pharmaceutically acceptable prodrugs, and pharmaceutically active metabolites of such compounds, and pharmaceutically acceptable salts of such metabolites.
  • pharmaceutically acceptable salts, pharmaceutically acceptable prodrugs, and pharmaceutically active metabolites of such compounds are at times collectively referred to herein as “HIV Integrase agents.”
  • the invention also relates to pharmaceutical compositions each comprising a therapeutically effective amount of an HIV Integrase agent of the invention in combination with a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier, diluent or carrier therefore.
  • the invention is directed to methods of inhibiting or modulating an enzyme activity of HIV Integrase, comprising contacting the enzyme with an effective amount of at least one HIV Integrase agent.
  • the invention also relates to methods of treating a disease or condition mediated by HIV, comprising administering to a mammal in need of such treatment a therapeutically effective amount of at least one HIV Integrase agent.
  • the disease or condition mediated by HIV may be, for example, AIDS or ARC.
  • the invention is directed to methods of evaluating the HIV integrase modulatory activity of a test compound, comprising:
  • the compounds of Formula I are useful for modulating or inhibiting HIV Integrase enzyme. More particularly, the compounds of Formula I are useful as modulators or inhibitors of HIV Integrase activity, and thus are useful for the prevention and/or treatment of HIV mediated diseases or conditions (e.g., AIDS, and ARC), alone or in combination with other known antiviral agents.
  • HIV mediated diseases or conditions e.g., AIDS, and ARC
  • alkyl refers to a straight- or branched-chain alkyl group having from 1 to 12 carbon atoms in the chain.
  • exemplary alkyl groups include methyl (Me, which also may be structurally depicted by “/”), ethyl (Et), n-propyl, isopropyl, butyl, isobutyl, sec-butyl, tert-butyl (tBu), pentyl, isopentyl, neo-pentyl, hexyl, isohexyl, and the like.
  • heteroalkyl refers to a straight- or branched-chain alkyl group having from 2 to 12 atoms in the chain, one or more of which is a heteroatom selected from S, O, and N.
  • exemplary heteroalkyls include alkyl ethers, secondary and tertiary alkyl amines, alkyl sulfides, and the like.
  • alkenyl refers to a straight- or branched-chain alkenyl group having from 2 to 12 carbon atoms in the chain.
  • Illustrative alkenyl groups include prop-2-enyl, but-2-enyl, but-3-enyl, 2-methylprop-2-enyl, hex-2-enyl, and the like.
  • alkynyl refers to a straight- or branched-chain alkynyl group having from 2 to 12 carbon atoms in the chain.
  • Illustrative alkynyl groups include prop-2-ynyl, but-2-ynyl, but-3-ynyl, 2-methylbut-2-ynyl, hex-2-ynyl, and the like.
  • haloalkyl refers to a straight- or branched-chain alkyl or alkenyl group having from 2-12 carbon atoms in the chain and where one or more hydrogens is substituted with a halogen.
  • Illustrative haloalkyl groups include trifluoromethyl, 2-bromopropyl, 3-chlorohexyl, 1-iodo-isobutyl, and the like.
  • aryl refers to a monocyclic, or fused or spiro polycyclic, aromatic carbocycle (ring structure having ring atoms that are all carbon) having from 3 to 12 ring atoms per ring.
  • aryl groups include the following moieties:
  • heteroaryl refers to a monocyclic, or fused or spiro polycyclic, aromatic heterocycle (ring structure having ring atoms selected from carbon atoms as well as nitrogen, oxygen, and sulfur heteroatoms) having from 3 to 12 ring atoms per ring.
  • aryl groups include the following moieties:
  • cycloalkyl refers to a saturated or partially saturated, monocyclic or fused or spiro polycyclic, carbocycle having from 3 to 12 ring atoms per ring.
  • Illustrative examples of cycloalkyl groups include the following moieties:
  • heterocycloalkyl refers to a monocyclic, or fused or spiro polycyclic, ring structure that is saturated or partially saturated and has from 3 to 12 ring atoms per ring selected from C atoms and N, O, and S heteroatoms.
  • ring atoms per ring selected from C atoms and N, O, and S heteroatoms.
  • heterocycloalkyl groups include:
  • halogen(s) represents chlorine, fluorine, bromine or iodine.
  • halo represents chloro, fluoro, bromo or iodo.
  • substituted means that the specified group or moiety bears one or more substituents.
  • unsubstituted means that the specified group bears no substituents.
  • optionally substituted means that the specified group is unsubstituted or substituted by one or more substituents.
  • HIV Integrase agents in accordance with the invention include active tautomeric and stereoisomeric forms of the compounds of Formula I, which may be readily obtained using techniques known in the art.
  • optically active (R) and (S) isomers may be prepared via a stereospecific synthesis, e.g., using chiral synthons and chiral reagents, or racemic mixtures may be resolved using conventional techniques.
  • a compound of Formula I may exist as an “E” or “Z” configurational isomer, or a mixture of E and Z isomers. It is therefore to be understood that a formula is intended to represent any configurational form of the depicted compound and is not to be limited merely to a specific compound form depicted by the formula drawings.
  • inventive compounds may exist as single stereoisomers (i.e., essentially free of other stereoisomers), racemates, and/or mixtures of enantiomers and/or diastereomers. All such single stereoisomers, racemates and mixtures thereof are intended to be within the scope of the present invention.
  • inventive compounds that are optically active are used in optically pure form.
  • an optically pure compound having one chiral center is one that consists essentially of one of the two possible enantiomers (i.e., is enantiomerically pure), and an optically pure compound having more than one chiral center is one that is both diastereomerically pure and enantiomerically pure.
  • the compounds of the present invention are used in a form that is at least 90% optically pure, that is, a form that contains at least 90% of a single isomer (80% enantiomeric excess (‘e.e.’) or diastereomeric excess (‘d.e.’)), more preferably at least 95% (90% e.e. or d.e.), even more preferably at least 97.5% (95% e.e. or d.e.), and most preferably at least 99% (98% e.e. or d.e.).
  • Formula I is intended to cover, where applicable, solvated as well as unsolvated forms of the compounds.
  • each formula includes compounds having the indicated structure, including the hydrated as well as the non-hydrated forms.
  • the HIV Integrase agents of the invention include pharmaceutically acceptable salts, prodrugs, and active metabolites of such compounds, and pharmaceutically acceptable salts of such metabolites.
  • a “pharmaceutically acceptable prodrug” is a compound that may be converted under physiological conditions or by solvolysis to the specified compound or to a pharmaceutically acceptable salt of such compound.
  • a “pharmaceutically active metabolite” is a pharmacologically active product produced through metabolism in the body of a specified compound or salt thereof, Prodrugs and active metabolites of a compound may be identified using routine techniques known in the art. See, e.g., Bertolini et al., J. Med.
  • pharmaceutically acceptable salts refers to salt forms that are pharmacologically acceptable and substantially non-toxic to the subject being administered the HIV Integrase agent.
  • Pharmaceutically acceptable salts include conventional acid-addition salts or base-addition salts formed from suitable non-toxic organic or inorganic acids or inorganic bases.
  • Exemplary acid-addition salts include those derived from inorganic acids such as hydrochloric acid, hydrobromic acid, hydroiodic acid, sulfuric acid, sulfamic acid, phosphoric acid, and nitric acid, and those derived from organic acids such as p-toluenesulfonic acid, methanesulfonic acid, ethane-disulfonic acid, isothionic acid, oxalic acid, p-bromophenylsulfonic acid, carbonic acid, succinic acid, citric acid, benzoic acid, 2-acetoxybenzoic acid, acetic acid, phenylacetic acid, propionic acid, glycolic acid, stearic acid, lactic acid, malic acid, tartaric acid, ascorbic acid, maleic acid, hydroxymaleic acid, glutamic acid, salicylic acid, sulfanilic acid, and fumaric acid.
  • inorganic acids such as hydrochloric acid, hydro
  • Exemplary base-addition salts include those derived from ammonium hydroxides (e.g., a quaternary ammonium hydroxide such as tetramethylammonium hydroxide), those derived from inorganic bases such as alkali or alkaline earth-metal (e.g., sodium, potassium, lithium, calcium, or magnesium) hydroxides, and those derived from organic bases such as amines, benzylamines, piperidines, and pyrrolidines.
  • ammonium hydroxides e.g., a quaternary ammonium hydroxide such as tetramethylammonium hydroxide
  • inorganic bases such as alkali or alkaline earth-metal (e.g., sodium, potassium, lithium, calcium, or magnesium) hydroxides
  • organic bases such as amines, benzylamines, piperidines, and pyrrolidines.
  • the desired pharmaceutically acceptable salt may be prepared by any suitable method available in the art, for example, treatment of the free base with an inorganic acid, such as hydrochloric acid, hydrobromic acid, sulfuric acid, nitric acid, phosphoric acid and the like, or with an organic acid, such as acetic acid, maleic acid, succinic acid, mandelic acid, fumaric acid, malonic acid, pyruvic acid, oxalic acid, glycolic acid, salicylic acid, a pyranosidyl acid, such as glucuronic acid or galacturonic acid, an alpha-hydroxy acid, such as citric acid or tartaric acid, an amino acid, such as aspartic acid or glutamic acid, an aromatic acid, such as benzoic acid or cinnamic acid, a sulfonic acid, such as p-toluenesulfonic acid or ethanesulfonic acid, or the like.
  • an inorganic acid such as hydrochloric acid
  • the desired pharmaceutically acceptable salt may be prepared by any suitable method, for example, treatment of the free acid with an inorganic or organic base, such as an amine (primary, secondary or tertiary), an alkali metal hydroxide or alkaline earth metal hydroxide, or the like.
  • suitable salts include organic salts derived from amino acids, such as glycine and arginine, ammonia, primary, secondary, and tertiary amines, and cyclic amines, such as piperidine, morpholine and piperazine, and inorganic salts derived from sodium, calcium, potassium, magnesium, manganese, iron, copper, zinc, aluminum and lithium.
  • Preferred HIV Integrase agents of the invention include compounds represented by Formula I:
  • R 1 is hydrogen or —C(O)OR c , where R c is an unsubstituted alkyl, unsubstituted alkenyl, or unsubstituted alkynyl group;
  • R 2 is hydrogen or an alkyl, alkenyl, or heteroalkyl group, unsubstituted or substituted with one or more substituents independently selected from the group consisting of:
  • R 3 is hydrogen or an alkyl, alkenyl, or heteroalkyl group, unsubstituted or substituted with one or more substituents independently selected from the group consisting of:
  • R 4 is hydrogen or an alkyl group, unsubstituted or substituted with —OR f , where R f is an unsubstituted alkyl group;
  • R 5 is hydrogen or an alkyl group
  • R 6 is hydrogen or an alkyl group unsubstituted or substituted with an aryl group
  • R 7 is hydrogen or an alkyl, alkenyl, or aryl group, unsubstituted or substituted with an aryl group, unsubstituted or substituted with one or more halogens;
  • X is C or N
  • Y is C
  • Z is C or N
  • HIV Integrase agents of the Formula I More preferred are HIV Integrase agents of the Formula I, where
  • R 1 is hydrogen or —C(O)O-ethyl
  • R 2 is hydrogen, methyl, ethyl, propyl, vinyl, allyl, or benzyl, unsubstituted or substituted with one or more substituents independently selected from the group consisting of:
  • R 3 is methyl, ethyl, butyl, or benzyl, unsubstituted or substituted with one or more substituents independently selected from the group consisting of:
  • R 4 is hydrogen, methyl or methoxymethyl
  • R 5 is hydrogen or methyl
  • R 6 is hydrogen, methyl, or benzyl
  • R 7 is hydrogen, methyl, benzyl, phenyl, allyl, or tert-butyl, unsubstituted or substituted with one or more halogens;
  • HIV Integrase agents of the Formula I wherein
  • R 1 is hydrogen or —C(O)O-ethyl
  • R 2 is selected from
  • R 3 is selected from
  • R 4 is hydrogen, methyl or methoxymethyl
  • R 5 is hydrogen or methyl
  • R 6 is hydrogen, methyl, or benzyl
  • R 7 is hydrogen, methyl, benzyl, phenyl, pentafluorobenzyl, allyl, tert-butyl;
  • HIV Integrase enzyme activity compounds that modulate or inhibit HIV Integrase enzyme activity are desirable and are a preferred embodiment of the present invention.
  • the activity of a HIV Integrase agent as an HIV Integrase inhibitor may be measured by any of the methods available to those skilled in the art, including in vivo and in vitro assays.
  • ligand-binding assays may be used to determine interaction with an enzyme of interest.
  • a labeled enzyme may be used, wherein the label is a fluorescer, radioisotope, or the like, which registers a quantifiable change upon binding to the enzyme.
  • the skilled artisan may employ an antibody for binding to the enzyme, wherein the antibody is labeled allowing for amplification of the signal.
  • binding may be determined through direct measurement of ligand binding to an enzyme.
  • binding may be determined by competitive displacement of a ligand bound to an enzyme, wherein the ligand is labeled with a detectable label.
  • inhibitory activity is of interest, an intact organism or cell may be studied, and the change in an organismic or cellular function in response to the binding of the Inhibitory compound may be measured.
  • cellular response can be determined microscopically by monitoring viral induced syncytium-formation (HIV-1 syncytium-formation assays), for example.
  • HIV-1 syncytium-formation assays viral induced syncytium-formation assays
  • Exemplary specific assay formats used to measure integrase-mediated integration include, but are not limited to, ELISA, DELFIA® (PerkinElmer Life Sciences Inc. (Boston, Mass.)) and ORIGEN® (IGEN International, Inc. (Gaithersburg, Md.)) technologies.
  • gel-based integration detecting integration by measuring product formation with SDS-PAGE
  • SPA scintillation proximity assay
  • the preferred assay is an integrase strand-transfer SPA (stINTSPA) which uses SPA to specifically measure the strand-transfer mechanism of integrase in a homogenous assay scalable for miniaturization to allow high-throughput screening.
  • stINTSPA integrase strand-transfer SPA
  • the assay focuses on strand transfer and not on DNA binding and/or 3′ processing. This sensitive and reproducible assay is capable of distinguishing non-specific interactions from true enzymatic function by forming 3′ processed viral DNA/integrase complexes before the addition of target DNA.
  • Such a formation creates a bias toward compound modulators (e.g., inhibitors) of strand-transfer and not toward compounds that inhibit integrase 3′ processing or prevent the association of integrase with viral DNA.
  • This bias renders the assay more specific than known assays.
  • the homogenous nature of the assay reduces the number of steps required to run the assay since the wash steps of a heterogenous assay are not required.
  • the integrase strand-transfer SPA format consists of 2 DNA components that model viral DNA and target DNA.
  • the model viral DNA also known as donor DNA
  • the target DNA also known as host DNA
  • the target DNA is a random nucleotide sequence of ds-DNA generally containing [ 3 H]-thymidine nucleotides on both strands, preferably, at the 3′ ends, to enable detection of the integrase strand-transfer reaction that occurs on both strands of target ds-DNA.
  • Integrase (created recombinantly or synthetically and preferably, purified) is pre-complexed to the viral DNA bound to a surface, such as for example, streptavidin-coated SPA beads.
  • a surface such as for example, streptavidin-coated SPA beads.
  • the integrase is pre-complexed in a batch process by combining and incubating diluted viral DNA with integrase and then removing unbound integrase.
  • the preferred molar ratio of viral DNA:integrase is about 1:about 5.
  • the integrase/viral DNA incubation is optional, however, the incubation does provide for an increased specificity index with an integrase/viral DNA incubation time of about 15 to about 30 minutes at room temperature or at about 37° C.
  • the preferred incubation is at about room temperature for about 15 minutes.
  • the reaction is initiated by adding target DNA, in the absence or presence of a potential integrase modulator compound, to the integrase/viral DNA beads (for example) and allowed to run for about 20 to about 50 minutes (depending on the type of assay container employed), at about room temperature or about 37° C., preferably, at about 37° C.
  • the assay is terminated by adding stop buffer to the integrase reaction mixture.
  • Components of the stop buffer function to terminate enzymatic activity, dissociate integrase/DNA complexes, separate non-integrated DNA strands (denaturation agent), and, optionally, float the SPA beads to the surface of the reaction mixture to be closer in range to the detectors of, for example, a plate-based scintillation counter, to measure the level of integrated viral DNA which is quantified as light emitted (radiolabeled signal) from the SPA beads.
  • an additional component in the stop buffer such as for example CsCl or functionally equivalent compound
  • a plate-based scintillation counter for example, with detectors positioned above the assay wells, such as for example a TopCount® counter (PerkinElmer Life Sciences Inc. (Boston, Mass.)).
  • CsCl would not be employed when PMT readings are taken from the bottom of the plate, such as for example when a MicroBeta® counter (PerkinElmer Life Sciences Inc. (Boston, Mass.)) is used.
  • the specificity of the reaction can be determined from the ratio of the signal generated from the target DNA reaction with the viral DNA/integrase compared to the signal generated from the di-deoxy viral DNA/integrase.
  • High concentrations (e.g., ⁇ 50 nM) of target DNA may increase the d/dd DNA ratio along with an increased concentration of integrase in the integrase/viral DNA sample.
  • the results can be used to evaluate the integrase modulatory, such as for example inhibitory, activity of test compounds.
  • the skilled artisan may employ a high-throughput screening method to test combinatorial compound libraries or synthetic compounds.
  • the percent inhibition of the compound may be calculated using an equation such as for example (1 ⁇ ((CPM sample ⁇ CPM min)/(CPM max ⁇ CPM min))*100.
  • the min value is the assay signal in the presence of a known modulator, such as for example an inhibitor, at a concentration about 100-fold higher than the IC 50 for that compound.
  • the min signal approximates the true background for the assay.
  • the max value is the assay signal obtained for the integrase-mediated activity in the absence of compound.
  • the IC 50 values of synthetic and purified combinatorial compounds may be determined whereby compounds are prepared at about 10 or 100-fold higher concentrations than desired for testing in assays, followed by dilution of the compounds to generate an 8-point titration curve with 1 ⁇ 2-log dilution intervals, for example.
  • the compound sample is then transferred to an assay well, for example. Further dilutions, such as for example, a 10-fold dilution, are optional.
  • the percentage inhibition for an inhibitory compound may then be determined as above with values applied to a nonlinear regression, sigmoidal dose response equation (variable slope) using GraphPad Prism curve fitting software (GraphPad Software, Inc., San Diego, Calif.) or functionally equivalent software.
  • the stINTSPA assay conditions are preferably optimized for ratios of integrase, viral DNA and target DNA to generate a large and specific assay signal.
  • a specific assay signal is defined as a signal distinguishing true strand-transfer catalytic events from complex formation of integrase and DNA that does not yield product.
  • a large non-specific component often contributes to the total assay signal unless the buffer conditions are rigorously optimized and counter-tested using a modified viral DNA oligonucleotide.
  • the non-specific background is due to formation of integrase/viral DNA/target DNA complexes that are highly stable independent of a productive strand-transfer mechanism.
  • the preferred stINTSPA distinguishes complex formation from productive strand-transfer reactions by using a modified viral DNA oligonucleotide containing a di-deoxy nucleoside at the 3′ end as a control.
  • This modified control DNA can be incorporated into integrase/viral DNA/target DNA complexes, but cannot serve as a substrate for strand-transfer. Thus, a distinct window between productive and non-productive strand-transfer reactions can be observed.
  • reactions with di-deoxy viral DNA beads give an assay signal closely matched to the true background of the assay using the preferred optimization conditions of the assay.
  • the true background of the assay is defined as a reaction with all assay components (viral DNA and [ 3 H]-target DNA) in the absence of integrase.
  • Assay buffers used in the integrase assay generally contain at least one reducing agent, such as for example 2-mercaptoethanol or DTT, wherein DTT as a fresh powder is preferred; at least one divalent cation, such as for example Mg ++ , Mn ++ , or Zn ++ , preferably, Mg ++ ; at least one emulsifier/dispersing agent, such as for example octoxynol (also known as IGEPAL-CA or NP40) or CHAPS; NaCl or functionally equivalent compound; DMSO or functionally equivalent compound; and at least one buffer, such as for example MOPS.
  • reducing agent such as for example 2-mercaptoethanol or DTT, wherein DTT as a fresh powder is preferred
  • at least one divalent cation such as for example Mg ++ , Mn ++ , or Zn ++ , preferably, Mg ++
  • at least one emulsifier/dispersing agent such as for example o
  • Key buffer characteristics are the absence of PEG; inclusion of a high concentration of a detergent, such as for example about 1 to about 5 mM CHAPS and/or about 0.02 to about 0.15% IGEPAL-CA or functionally equivalent compound(s) at least capable of reducing non-specific sticking to the SPA beads and assay wells and, possibly, enhancing the specificity index; inclusion of a high concentration of DMSO (about 1 to about 12%); and inclusion of modest levels of NaCl ( ⁇ 50 mM) and MgCl 2 (about 3 to about 10 mM) or functionally equivalent compounds capable of reducing the dd-DNA background.
  • the assay buffers may optionally contain a preservative, such as for example NaN 3 , to reduce fungal and bacterial contaminants during storage.
  • the stop buffer preferably contains EDTA or functionally equivalent compound capable of terminating enzymatic activity, a denaturation agent comprising, for example, NaOH or guanidine hydrochloride, and, optionally, CsCl or functionally equivalent compound capable of assisting in floating the SPA beads to the top of the assay container for scintillation detection at the top of the reservoir and, possibly, minimizing compound interference.
  • a denaturation agent comprising, for example, NaOH or guanidine hydrochloride
  • CsCl or functionally equivalent compound capable of assisting in floating the SPA beads to the top of the assay container for scintillation detection at the top of the reservoir and, possibly, minimizing compound interference.
  • An example of an integrase strand-transfer SPA is set forth in Example 64.
  • the level of activity of the modulatory compounds may be determined in an antiviral assay, such as for example an assay that quantitatively measures the production of viral antigens (e.g., HIV-1 p24) or the activities of viral enzymes (e.g., HIV-1 reverse transcriptase) as indicators of virus replication, or that measures viral replication by monitoring the expression of an exogenous reporter gene introduced into the viral genome (HIV-1 reporter virus assays) (Chen, B. K. et al., J. Virol. 68(2): 654-460 (1994); Terwilliger, E. F. et al., PNAS 66:3857-3861 (1989)).
  • a preferred method of measuring antiviral activity of a potential modulator compound employs an HIV-1 cell protection assay, wherein virus replication is measured indirectly by monitoring viral induced host-cell cytopathic effects using, for example, dye reduction methods as set forth in Example 65.
  • Preferred HIV integrase agents of the invention include those having an EC 50 value of at least 10 ⁇ 5 M (or at least 10 ⁇ M) when measured with an HIV cell protection assay.
  • Especially preferred anti-integrase agents are those having an EC 50 value of at least 1 ⁇ M when measured with an HIV cell protection assay. Even more preferred are those agents having an EC 50 value of at least 0.1 ⁇ M when measured with an HIV cell protection assay.
  • compositions of the invention may be formulated into pharmaceutical compositions as described below in any pharmaceutical form recognizable to the skilled artisan as being suitable.
  • Pharmaceutical compositions of the invention comprise a therapeutically effective amount of at least one compound of Formula I and an inert, pharmaceutically acceptable carrier or diluent.
  • a “therapeutically effective amount” is intended to mean that amount of a compound that, when administered to a mammal in need of such treatment, is sufficient to effect treatment, as defined herein.
  • a therapeutically effective amount of a compound of the Formula I, salt, active metabolite or prodrug thereof is a quantity sufficient to modulate or inhibit the activity of HIV Integrase such that a disease condition that is mediated by activity is reduced or alleviated.
  • an exemplary daily dose generally employed will be from about 0.001 to about 1000 mg/kg of body weight, with courses of treatment repeated at appropriate intervals.
  • Administration of prodrugs may be dosed at weight levels that are chemically equivalent to the weight levels of the fully active compounds.
  • a pharmaceutical composition of the invention is administered in a suitable formulation prepared by combining a therapeutically effective amount (i.e., an HIV Integrase modulating, regulating, or inhibiting amount effective to achieve therapeutic efficacy) of at least one HIV Integrase agent of the invention (as an active ingredient) with one or more pharmaceutically suitable carriers, which may be selected, for example, from diluents, excipients and auxiliaries that facilitate processing of the active compounds into the final pharmaceutical preparations.
  • a therapeutically effective amount i.e., an HIV Integrase modulating, regulating, or inhibiting amount effective to achieve therapeutic efficacy
  • one HIV Integrase agent of the invention as an active ingredient
  • pharmaceutically suitable carriers which may be selected, for example, from diluents, excipients and auxiliaries that facilitate processing of the active compounds into the final pharmaceutical preparations.
  • the present invention is directed to a pharmaceutical composition
  • a pharmaceutical composition comprising a therapeutically effective amount of at least one HIV Integrase agent in combination with one or more additional active ingredients, such as, for example, a second HIV Integrase agent, an HIV/AIDS antiviral agent, an anti-infective agent, and/or an immunomodulator.
  • the pharmaceutical carriers employed may be either solid or liquid.
  • Exemplary solid carriers are lactose, sucrose, talc, gelatin, agar, pectin, acacia, magnesium stearate, stearic acid and the like.
  • Exemplary liquid carriers are syrup, peanut oil, olive oil, water and the like.
  • the inventive compositions may include time-delay or time-release material known in the art, such as glyceryl monostearate or glyceryl distearate alone or with a wax, ethylcellulose, hydroxypropylmethylcellulose, methylmethacrylate or the like. Further additives or excipients may be added to achieve the desired formulation properties.
  • a bioavailability enhancer such as Labrasol, Gelucire or the like, or formulator, such as CMC (carboxy-methylcellulose), PG (propyleneglycol), or PEG (polyethyleneglycol), may be added.
  • CMC carboxy-methylcellulose
  • PG propyleneglycol
  • PEG polyethyleneglycol
  • Gelucire® a semi-solid vehicle that protects active ingredients from light, moisture and oxidation, may be added, e.g., when preparing a capsule formulation.
  • the preparation can be tableted, placed in a hard gelatin capsule in powder or pellet form, or formed into a troche or lozenge.
  • the amount of solid carrier may vary, but generally will be from about 25 mg to about 1 g.
  • the preparation may be in the form of syrup, emulsion, soft gelatin capsule, sterile injectable solution or suspension in an ampoule or vial or non-aqueous liquid suspension.
  • a semisolid carrier is used, the preparation may be in the form of hard and soft gelatin capsule formulations.
  • the inventive compositions are prepared in unit-dosage form appropriate for the mode of administration, e.g., parenteral or oral administration.
  • a pharmaceutically acceptable salt of an inventive agent may be dissolved in an aqueous solution of an organic or inorganic acid, such as 0.3 M solution of succinic acid or citric acid. If a soluble salt form is not available, the agent may be dissolved in a suitable cosolvent or combinations of cosolvents. Examples of suitable cosolvents include alcohol, propylene glycol, polyethylene glycol 300, polysorbate 80, glycerin and the like in concentrations ranging from 0-60% of the total volume.
  • a compound of Formula I is dissolved in DMSO and diluted with water.
  • the composition may also be in the form of a solution of a salt form of the active ingredient in an appropriate aqueous vehicle such as water or isotonic saline or dextrose solution.
  • the agents of the invention may be formulated into aqueous solutions, preferably in physiologically compatible buffers such as Hanks solution, Ringer's solution, or physiological saline buffer.
  • physiologically compatible buffers such as Hanks solution, Ringer's solution, or physiological saline buffer.
  • penetrants appropriate to the barrier to be permeated are used in the formulation. Such penetrants are generally known in the art.
  • the compounds can be formulated readily by combining the active compounds with pharmaceutically acceptable carriers known in the art.
  • Such carriers enable the compounds of the invention to be formulated as tablets, pills, dragees, capsules, liquids, gels, syrups, slurries, suspensions and the like, for oral ingestion by a patient to be treated.
  • Pharmaceutical preparations for oral use can be obtained using a solid excipient in admixture with the active ingredient (agent), optionally grinding the resulting mixture, and processing the mixture of granules after adding suitable auxiliaries, if desired, to obtain tablets or dragee cores.
  • Suitable excipients include: fillers such as sugars, including lactose, sucrose, mannitol, or sorbitol; and cellulose preparations, for example, maize starch, wheat starch, rice starch, potato starch, gelatin, gum, methyl cellulose, hydroxypropylmethyl-cellulose, sodium carboxymethylcellulose, or polyvinylpyrrolidone (PVP).
  • PVP polyvinylpyrrolidone
  • disintegrating agents may be added, such as crosslinked polyvinyl pyrrolidone, agar, or alginic acid or a salt thereof such as sodium alginate.
  • Dragee cores are provided with suitable coatings.
  • suitable coatings For this purpose, concentrated sugar solutions may be used, which may optionally contain gum arabic, polyvinyl pyrrolidone, Carbopol gel, polyethylene glycol, and/or titanium dioxide, lacquer solutions, and suitable organic solvents or solvent mixtures.
  • Dyestuffs or pigments may be added to the tablets or dragee coatings for identification or to characterize different combinations of active agents.
  • compositions which can be used orally include push-fit capsules made of gelatin, as well as soft, sealed capsules made of gelatin and a plasticizer, such as glycerol or sorbitol.
  • the push-fit capsules can contain the active ingredients in admixture with fillers such as lactose, binders such as starches, and/or lubricants such as talc or magnesium stearate, and, optionally, stabilizers.
  • the active agents may be dissolved or suspended in suitable liquids, such as fatty oils, liquid paraffin, or liquid polyethylene glycols.
  • stabilizers may be added. All formulations for oral administration should be in dosages suitable for such administration.
  • the compositions may take the form of tablets or lozenges formulated in conventional manner.
  • the compounds for use according to the present invention may be conveniently delivered in the form of an aerosol spray presentation from pressurized packs or a nebuliser, with the use of a suitable propellant, e.g., dichlorodifluoromethane, trichlorofluoromethane, dichlorotetrafluoroethane, carbon dioxide or other suitable gas.
  • a suitable propellant e.g., dichlorodifluoromethane, trichlorofluoromethane, dichlorotetrafluoroethane, carbon dioxide or other suitable gas.
  • a suitable propellant e.g., dichlorodifluoromethane, trichlorofluoromethane, dichlorotetrafluoroethane, carbon dioxide or other suitable gas.
  • a suitable propellant e.g., dichlorodifluoromethane, trichlorofluoromethane, dichlorotetrafluoroethane, carbon dioxide
  • the compounds may be formulated for parenteral administration by injection, e.g., by bolus injection or continuous infusion.
  • Formulations for injection may be presented in unit-dosage form, e.g., in ampoules or in multi-dose containers, with an added preservative.
  • the compositions may take such forms as suspensions, solutions or emulsions in oily or aqueous vehicles, and may contain formulatory agents such as suspending, stabilizing and/or dispersing agents.
  • compositions for parenteral administration include aqueous solutions of the active compounds in water-soluble form. Additionally, suspensions of the active agents may be prepared as appropriate oily injection suspensions. Suitable lipophilic solvents or vehicles include fatty oils such as sesame oil, or synthetic fatty acid esters, such as ethyl oleate or triglycerides, or liposomes. Aqueous injection suspensions may contain substances which increase the viscosity of the suspension, such as sodium carboxymethyl cellulose, sorbitol, or dextran. Optionally, the suspension may also contain suitable stabilizers or agents which increase the solubility of the compounds to allow for the preparation of highly concentrated solutions.
  • the active ingredient may be in powder form for constitution with a suitable vehicle, e.g., sterile pyrogen-free water, before use.
  • a suitable vehicle e.g., sterile pyrogen-free water
  • the compounds may also be formulated as a depot preparation.
  • Such long-acting formulations may be administered by implantation (for example, subcutaneously or intramuscularly) or by intramuscular injection.
  • the compounds may be formulated with suitable polymeric or hydrophobic materials (for example, as an emulsion in an acceptable oil) or ion-exchange resins, or as sparingly soluble derivatives, for example, as a sparingly soluble salt.
  • a pharmaceutical carrier for hydrophobic compounds is a cosolvent system comprising benzyl alcohol, a nonpolar surfactant, a water-miscible organic polymer, and an aqueous phase.
  • the cosolvent system may be a VPD co-solvent system.
  • VPD is a solution of 3% w/v benzyl alcohol, 8% w/v of the nonpolar surfactant polysorbate 80, and 65% w/v polyethylene glycol 300, made up to volume in absolute ethanol.
  • the VPD co-solvent system (VPD: 5 W) contains VPD diluted 1:1 with a 5% dextrose in water solution. This co-solvent system dissolves hydrophobic compounds well, and itself produces low toxicity upon systemic administration.
  • the proportions of a co-solvent system may be suitably varied without destroying its solubility and toxicity characteristics.
  • identity of the co-solvent components may be varied: for example, other low-toxicity nonpolar surfactants may be used instead of polysorbate 80; the fraction size of polyethylene glycol may be varied; other biocompatible polymers may replace polyethylene glycol, e.g. polyvinyl pyrrolidone; and other sugars or polysaccharides may be substituted for dextrose.
  • hydrophobic pharmaceutical compounds may be employed.
  • Liposomes and emulsions are known examples of delivery vehicles or carriers for hydrophobic drugs.
  • Certain organic solvents such as dimethylsulfoxide also may be employed, although usually at the cost of greater toxicity due to the toxic nature of DMSO.
  • the compounds may be delivered using a sustained-release system, such as semipermeable matrices of solid hydrophobic polymers containing the therapeutic agent.
  • sustained-release materials have been established and are known by those skilled in the art. Sustained-release capsules may, depending on their chemical nature, release the compounds for a few weeks up to over 100 days.
  • additional strategies for protein stabilization may be employed.
  • the pharmaceutical compositions also may comprise suitable solid- or gel-phase carriers or excipients. These carriers and excipients may provide marked improvement in the bioavailability of poorly-soluble drugs. Examples of such carriers or excipients include calcium carbonate, calcium phosphate, sugars, starches, cellulose derivatives, gelatin, and polymers such as polyethylene glycols. Furthermore, additives or excipients such as Gelucire®, Capryol®, Labrafil®, Labrasol®, Lauroglycol®, Plurol®, Peceol® Transcutol® and the like may be used. Further, the pharmaceutical composition may be incorporated into a skin patch for delivery of the drug directly onto the skin.
  • Some of the compounds of the invention may be provided as salts with pharmaceutically compatible counter ions.
  • Pharmaceutically compatible salts may be formed with many acids, including hydrochloric, sulfuric, acetic, lactic, tartaric, malic, succinic, etc. Salts tend to be more soluble in aqueous or other protonic solvents than are the corresponding free-base forms.
  • the present invention is further directed to methods of modulating or inhibiting an enzyme activity of HIV Integrase, for example in mammals, by contacting the HIV Integrase enzyme with an effective amount of one or more HIV Integrase agent(s) or a composition comprising a HIV Integrase agent as described above. Additionally, the present invention is directed to methods of treating HIV mediated diseases or conditions by administering a therapeutically effective amount of one or more HIV Integrase agent(s) or a composition comprising a HIV Integrase agent to a mammal in need of such treatment.
  • treat refers to any treatment of a HIV Integrase mediated disease or condition in a mammal, particularly a human, and include: (I) preventing the disease or condition from occurring in a subject which may be predisposed to the condition, such that the treatment constitutes prophylactic treatment for the pathologic condition; (ii) modulating or inhibiting the disease or condition, i.e., arresting its development; (iii) relieving the disease or condition, i.e., causing regression of the disease or condition; or (iv) relieving and/or alleviating the disease or condition or the symptoms resulting from the disease or condition, e.g., relieving an inflammatory response without addressing the underlying disease or condition.
  • HIV Diseases or conditions mediated by HIV include, but are not limited to, AIDS and ARC.
  • inventive agents may be prepared using the reaction routes and synthesis schemes as described below, employing the techniques available in the art using starting materials that are readily available.
  • the preparation of preferred compounds of the present invention is described in detail in the following examples, but the artisan will recognize that the chemical reactions described may be readily adapted to prepare a number of other HIV Integrase agents of the invention.
  • the synthesis of non-exemplified compounds according to the invention may be performed by modifications apparent to those skilled in the art, e.g., by appropriately protecting interfering groups, by changing to other suitable reagents known in the art, or by making routine modifications of reaction conditions.
  • other reactions disclosed herein or known in the art will be recognized as having adaptability for preparing other compounds of the invention.
  • Reagents useful for synthesizing compounds may be obtained or prepared according to techniques known in the art. For example, the preparation of free amines from common salt forms and stock reagent solutions can be useful for small-scale reactions. See also Abdel-Magid et al., “Reductive Amination of Aldehydes and Ketones with Sodium Triacetoxyborohydride,” J. Org. Chem. 61: 3849 (1996).
  • Methanolic solutions of the free bases can be prepared from hydrochloride, dihydrochloride, hydrobromide, or other salts when the free base is soluble in methanol.
  • a 10-mL quantity of a 0.1M solution of a free base in methanol may be prepared as follows. Weigh 1.0 mmol of a monohydrochloride salt into a tared Erienmeyer flask containing a stirring bar, and add 7 mL of methanol.
  • a 0.5 M solution of sodium borohydride in ethanol may be prepared as follows. Sodium borohydride (520 mg, 13.8 mmol) is stirred in pure (non-denatured) anhydrous ethanol (25 mL) for ⁇ 2-3 minutes. The suspension is filtered through a medium fritted glass funnel to remove a small amount of undissolved solid (typically about 5% of the total mass of borohydride, or 25 mg). The filtrate should appear as a colorless solution that evolves only a little hydrogen. This solution should be used immediately, as it decomposes significantly over a period of a few hours, resulting in the formation of a gelatinous precipitate.
  • Sodium borohydride is hygroscopic, so avoid exposure to air by making the solution at once after weighing the solid.
  • Sodium borohydride has a solubility of about 4% in ethanol at room temperature. This corresponds to a little over 0.8 M. However, sometimes a small percentage of the solid remains undissolved regardless of the concentration being prepared, even after stirring for ⁇ 5 minutes.
  • THF tetrahydrofuran
  • DMF N,N-dimethylformamide
  • TLC thin-layer-chromatography
  • HATU O-(azabenzotriazole-1-yl)-1,1,3,3-tetramethyl uronium hexafluorophosphate
  • EDC N-(3-dimethylaminopropyl)N′-ethylcarbodiimide. Additional abbreviations employed throughout the application are either known to those skilled in the art or are explained in the Examples below.
  • THF Tetrahydrofuran
  • DMF N,N-dimethylformamide
  • the reactions set forth below were performed under a positive pressure of nitrogen, argon or with a drying tube, at ambient temperature (unless otherwise stated), in anhydrous solvents, and the reaction flasks are fitted with rubber septa for the introduction of substrates and reagents via syringe. Glassware was oven-dried and/or heat-dried. Analytical thin-layer chromatography was performed on glass-backed silica gel 60° F. 254 plates (Analtech (0.25 mm)) and eluted with the appropriate solvent ratios (v/v). The reactions were assayed by TLC and terminated as judged by the consumption of starting material.
  • the TLC plates were visualized by UV absorption or with a p-anisaldehyde spray reagent or a phosphomolybdic acid reagent (Aldrich Chemical, 20 wt % in ethanol) which was activated with heat. Work-ups were typically done by doubling the reaction volume with the reaction solvent or extraction solvent and then washing with the indicated aqueous solutions using 25% by volume of the extraction volume (unless otherwise indicated). Product solutions were dried over anhydrous Na 2 SO 4 prior to filtration, and evaporation of the solvents was under reduced pressure on a rotary evaporator and noted as solvents removed in vacuo. Flash column chromatography [Still et al., A. J. Org. Chem.
  • NMR spectra were recorded on a Bruker instrument operating at 300 MHz, 500 MHz, and 13 C-NMR spectra was recorded operating at 75 MHz.
  • NMR spectra are obtained as CDCl 3 solutions (reported in ppm), using chloroform as the reference standard (7.25 ppm and 77.00 ppm) or CD 3 OD (3.4 and 4.8 ppm and 49.3 ppm), or an internal tetramethylsilane standard (0.00 ppm) when appropriate.
  • Other NMR solvents were used as needed.
  • Infrared spectra were recorded on a Perkin-Elmer FT-IR Spectrometer as neat oils, as KBr pellets, or as CDCl 3 solutions, and when reported are in wave numbers (cm ⁇ 1 ). The mass spectra were obtained using LC/MS or APCI. All melting points are uncorrected.
  • the compounds of the present invention can be prepared directly from compound 1-1 (preferably a methyl or ethyl ester) and a substituted or unsubstituted hydroxyl amine in the presence of a base, such as, for example, sodium hydroxide or sodium alkoxide in methanol or ethanol (Hauser, C. R. et al., Org. Synth. Coll . Vol. 2, p. 67, John Wiley, New York (1943)).
  • a base such as, for example, sodium hydroxide or sodium alkoxide in methanol or ethanol (Hauser, C. R. et al., Org. Synth. Coll . Vol. 2, p. 67, John Wiley, New York (1943)).
  • the compound 1-1 can be saponified to the free acid 1-2 using lithium hydroxide or sodium hydroxide in methanol/water mixtures and heating the mixture to 100° C. in a SmithCreator® microwave for 1 to 5 min.
  • Compound 1-2 can be coupled with a substituted or unsubstituted hydroxylamine using a coupling reagent.
  • Typical coupling reagents and conditions can be used, such as, for example, O-azabenzotriazole-1-yl)-1,1,3,3-tetramethyl uronium hexafluorophosphate (HATU), N-3-dimethylaminopropyl)-N′-ethylcarbodiimide (EDC) in DMF at ambient temperature, or many others that are familiar to those skilled in the art.
  • Other suitable methods are described, for example, in Jerry March, Advanced Organic Chemistry, 5th edition, John Whiley & Sons, p. 508-511 (2001). The use of the preferred conditions described in this Scheme would allow for parallel preparation or combinatorial libraries of such hydroxamates 13.
  • a base such as, for example, triethylamine
  • Reductive amination with a suitable substituted glycine ester compound 2-3 and a reducing agent, such as, for example, NaCNBH 3 or NaBH(OAc) 3 (Abdet-Magid, A. F. et al., Tetrahedron Lett., 31, 5595-5598 (1990)) can provide the amine compound 2-4. Additional methods for reductive amination exist and are reviewed in C. F. Lane, Synthesis, p. 135 (1975). Titanium tetrachloride mediated cyclization (Dekhane, M.
  • the pyrrole nitrogen can be protected as a sulfonamide using the same methods described in scheme 2. Addition of the anion of a N-Cbz glycine ester can provide the intermediate compound 3-4.
  • Removal of the Cbz protecting group can be achieved using palladium catalyzed hydrogenation or other methods, such as those described in T. W. Greene, Protective Groups in Organic Chemistry, 3 rd edition, John Wiley & Sons, pp. 531-537 (1999). Pictet-Spengler condensation followed by palladium catalyzed dehydrogenation in xylene can afford the intermediate compound 2-5.
  • Reaction of compound 4-1 with Eschenmoser' salt can give the dimethylaminomethyl derivative compound 4-2.
  • this step can be performed using classic Mannich reaction conditions (review: Brewster, J. H. et al., Org. Reactions, 7, p. 99 (1953)).
  • the histidine precursor compound 5-1 is commercially available or can be prepared according published methods (Kelley, J. L. et al., J. Med. Chem. 20, pp. 721-723 (1977); Trout, G., J. Med. Chem., 15, pp. 1259-1261 (1972)).
  • Pictet-Spengler reaction of compound 5-1 (Guzman, F. et al., J. Med. Chem., 27, pp. 564-570 (1984); Cain, M. et al., Heterocycles, 19, pp.
  • Scheme 6 depicts a method for formation of N-hydroxy lactame compounds 6-5 and 6-6 (where R 1 ⁇ H or CO 2 Et; R 2 ⁇ H; R 5 ⁇ H).
  • Radical bromination of a methyl substituted indole 6-1 can be achieved by various reagents (March, Jerry, Advanced Organic Chemistry, 5th edition, John Whiley & Sons, pp. 911-914 (2001)), the most common being N-bromosuccinimide (NBS). It will be apparent to those skilled in the art that successful execution of this reaction can depend highly on the substitution pattern of the precursor 6-1.
  • Reaction of an alkylhalide compound 6-2 Doisy, X. et al., Bioorg. Med. Chem., 7, pp.
  • Reaction of compound 8-1 with Eschenmoser' salt can give the dimethylaminomethyl derivative compound 8-2.
  • this step can be performed using classic Mannich reaction conditions (review. Brewster, J. H. et al., Org. Reactions, 7, p. 99 (1953)).
  • compound 8-2 Upon treatment of compound 8-2 with sodium acetate and acetic anhydride in acetonitrile (Cocker, J. N.
  • triphenylphosphine diisopropylazodicarboxylate and a base, such as, for example, triethylamine, can provide a phenolic ether compound 8-6, and the benzylic isomer compound 8-7 formed via C-alkylation of the phenol compound 8-5.
  • Scheme 9 depicts a general method for formation of compounds of general structure 1-1 described by Gilchrist, T. L. et al, J. C. S. Chem. Comm., pp. 627-628 (1979); Henn, L., J. Chem. Soc. Perkin Trans., 1, pp. 2189-2196 (1984); and Shafiee, A. et al., J. Heterocyclic Chem., 23, pp. 1171-1173 (1986).
  • Staudinger reaction using triphenylphosphine can generate iminiphosphorane compound 10-4 that can undergo aza-Wittig type reactions with isocyanates (Molina, P. et al., Synthesis, pp. 45-48 (1987); Krutosikova, A. et al., Monatsh. Chem., 123, pp. 807-815 (1992)) to form compound 10-6 via intermediate 10-5.
  • the iminophosphorane compound 10-4 can be reacted with aldehydes and ketenes to provide compound 9-4 or 10-9 through intermediates 10-7 or 10-8, receptively.
  • reaction mixture was cooled, quenched with saturated aqueous sodium bicarbonate solution (30 mL), and extracted with ethyl acetate (3 ⁇ 30 mL). The combined organic extracts were dried over sodium sulfate, concentrated and purified by flash chromatograph with methanol/dichloromethane (1:10) to provide the title compound (1.5 g, yield 85%).
  • the title compound can be prepared by coupling of 3-(2,3-difluorobenzyl)-3H-imidazo[4,5-c]pyridine-6-carboxylic acid and N-phenoxyamine under the same conditions as those in step (c) of example 1.
  • the title compound can be prepared by coupling of 3-(2,3-difluorobenzyl)-3H-imidazo[4,5-c]pyridine-6-carboxylic acid and N-methoxyamine under the same conditions as those in step (c) of example 1.
  • the title compound can be prepared by coupling of 3-(2,3-difluorobenzyl)-3H-imidazo[4,5-c]pyridine-6-carboxylic acid and N-allyloxyamine under the same conditions as those in step (c) of example 1.
  • the title compound can be prepared from 1-(4-fluoro-benzyl)-1H-imidazo[4,5-c]pyridine-6-carboxylic acid and N-phenoxyamine under the same conditions as those in step (c) of Example 1.
  • the title compound can be prepared by coupling of 3-(2,3-difluorobenzyl)-3H-imidazo[4,5-c]pyridine-6-carboxylic acid and N-(tert-butoxy)amine under the same conditions as those in step (c) of Example 1.
  • the title compound can be prepared by coupling of 3-(3-methyl-butyl)-3H-imidazo[4,5-c]pyridine-6-carboxylic acid [prepared by alkylation of methyl 1H-imidazo[4,5-c]pyridine-6-carboxylate with 1-bromo-3-methyl-butane in a manner similar to step (d) of example 16] and N-methoxyamine under the same conditions as those in step (c) of Example 1.
  • the title compound can be prepared by coupling of 3-(3-methyl-butyl)-3H-imidazo[4,5-c]pyridine-6-carboxylic acid (prepared by alkylation of methyl 1H-imidazo[4,5-c]pyridine-6-carboxylic with 1-bromo-3-methyl-butane in a manner similar to step (d) of example 16) and N-phenoxyamine under the same conditions as those in step (c) of Example 1.
  • the title compound can be prepared by coupling of 3-(2-cyclohexyl-ethyl)-3H-imidazo[4,5-c]pyridine-6-carboxylic acid (prepared by alkylation of methyl 1H-imidazo[4,5-c]pyridine-6-carboxylate with 1-bromo-3-cyclohexyl ethane in a manner similar to step (d) of example 16) and N-phenoxyamine under the same conditions as those in step (c) of Example 1.
  • the title compound can be prepared by coupling of 3-(2-cyclohexyl-ethyl)-3H-imidazo[4,5-c]pyridine-6-carboxylic acid (prepared by alkylation of methyl 1H-imidazo[4,5-c]pyridine-6-carboxylate with 1-bromo-3-cyclohexyl ethane in a manner similar to step (d) of example 16) and N-methoxyamine under the same conditions as those in step (c) of Example 1.
  • the title compound can be prepared by coupling of 3-(2-cyclohexyl-ethyl)-3H-imidazo[4,5-c]pyridine-6-carboxylic acid (prepared by alkylation of methyl 1H-imidazo[4,5-c]pyridine-carboxylate with 1-bromo-3-cyclohexyl ethane in a manner similar to step (d) of example 16) and N-allyloxyamine under the same conditions as those in step (c) of Example 1.
  • the title compound can be prepared from methyl 4-methoxymethyl-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-c]pyridine-5-carboxylate (prepared according to X. Doisy et al., Bioorg. Med. Chem. 1999, 7, 921-932) and 2,4-difluorobenzyl bromide following the steps as described in Example 1.
  • the title compound can be prepared from ethyl 3-(2-phenylvinyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-c]pyridine-5-carboxylate (prepared according to X. Doisy et al., Bioorg. Med. Chem. 1999, 7, 921-932) and 2,4-difluorobenzyl bromide following the steps as described in Example 1.
  • the title compound can be prepared from ethyl 3-(3-phenylprop-1-enyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-c]pyridine-5-carboxylate (prepared according to X. Doisy et al., Bioorg. Med. Chem. 1999, 7, 921-932) and 2,4-difluoro-benzyl bromide following the steps as described in Example 1.
  • the title compound can be prepared from ethyl 3-(2-phenylethyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-c]pyridine-5-carboxylate (prepared according to X. Doisy et al., Bioorg. Med. Chem. 1999, 7, 921-932) and 2,4-difluorobenzyl bromide following the steps as described in Example 1.
  • the title compound can be prepared from ethyl 3-(3-phenyl-propyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-c]pyridine-5-carboxylate (prepared according to X. Doisy et al., Bioorg. Med. Chem. 1999, 7, 921-932) and 2,4-difluorobenzyl bromide following the steps as described in Example 1.
  • the title compound can be prepared from ethyl 3-[(2-phenylethoxy)methyl]-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-c]pyridine-5-carboxylate (prepared according to X. Doisy et al., Bioorg. Med. Chem. 1999, 7, 921-932) and 2,4-difluorobenzyl bromide following the steps as described in Example 1.
  • the title compound can be prepared from ethyl 3- ⁇ [(3-phenylallyl)oxy]methyl ⁇ -1H-pyrrolo[2,3-c]pyridine-5-carboxylate (prepared according to X. Doisy et al., Bioorg. Med. Chem. 1999, 7, 921-932) and 2,4-difluorobenzyl bromide following the steps as described in Example 1.
  • the title compound can be prepared from ethyl 3-methyl-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-c]pyridine-5-carboxylate (prepared according to S. K. Singh et al., Heterocycles, 1997, 44, 379-391) and 2,4-difluorobenzyl bromide following the steps as described in Example 1.
  • the title compound can be prepared from ethyl 3-ethyl-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-c]pyridine-5-carboxylate (prepared according to S. K. Singh et al., Heterocycles, 1997, 44, 379-391) and 2,4-difluorobenzyl bromide following the steps as described in Example 1.
  • the title compound can be prepared from ethyl 3-allyl-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-c]pyridine-5-carboxylate (prepared according to S. K. Singh et al., Heterocycles, 1997, 44, 379-391) and 2,4-difluorobenzyl bromide following the steps as described in Example 1.
  • the title compound can be prepared from ethyl 7-methyl-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-c]pyridine-5-carboxylate (prepared according to J.-F. Rousseau, R. H. Dodd, J. Org. Chem. 1998, 63, 2731-2737) and 2,4-difluorobenzyl bromide following the steps as described in Example 1.
  • the title compound was prepared following the steps (a)-(f) in Example 55.
  • the title compound was prepared from the mixture of ethyl 3-(2,4-difluoro-phenoxymethyl)-1-ethyl-1H-pyrrolo[3,2-c]pyridine-6-carboxylate and ethyl 3-(3,5-difluoro-2-hydroxy-benzyl)-1-ethyl-1H-pyrrolo[3,2-]pyridin-6-carboxylate in a manner similar to step (e) of example 11. Purification by HPLC provided the pure title compound.
  • Oligonucleotides Oligonucleotide #1-5′-(biotin) CCCCTTTTAGTCAGTGTGGAAAATCTCTAGCA-3′ (SEQ ID NO: 1) and oligonucleotide #2-5′-ACTGCTAGAGATTTTCCACACTGACTAAAG-3′ (SEQ ID NO: 2), were synthesized by TriLink BioTechnologies, Inc. (San Diego, Calif.). The annealed product represents preprocessed viral ds-DNA derived from the LTR U5 sequence of the viral genome. A ds-DNA control to test for non-specific interactions was made using a 3′ di-deoxy derivative of oligonucleotide #1 annealed to oligonucleotide #2.
  • the CA overhang at the 5′ end of the non-biotinylated strand of the ds-DNA was created artificially by using a complimentary DNA oligonucleotide shortened by 2 base pairs. This configuration eliminates the requisite 3′ processing step of the integrase enzyme prior to the strand-transfer mechanism.
  • Host ds-DNA was prepared as an unlabeled and [3H]-thymidine labeled product from annealed oligonucleotide #3-5-AAAAAATGACCAAGGGCTAATTCACT-3′ (SEQ ID NO: 3), and oligonucleotide #4-5′-AAAAAAAGTGAATTAGCCCTTGGTCA-3′ (SEQ ID NO: 4), both synthesized by TriLink BioTechnologies, Inc. (San Diego, Calif.). The annealed product had overhanging 3′ ends of poly(dA). Host DNA was custom radiolabeled by PerkinElmer Life Sciences Inc.
  • radiolabeled product was purified using a NENSORB cartridge and stored in stabilized aqueous solution (PerkinElmer). The final radiolabeled product had six [3H]-thymidine nucleotides at both 5′ ends of the host ds-DNA.
  • Streptavidin-coated polyvinyltoluene (PVT) SPA beads were purchased from Amersham Pharmacia (Piscataway, N.J.). Cesium chloride was purchased from Shelton Scientific, Inc. (Shelton, Conn.). White polystyrene, flat bottom, non-binding surface 384-well plates were purchased from Corning. All other buffer components were purchased from Sigma (St. Louis, Mo.) unless otherwise indicated.
  • SF1 sequence (amino acids 1-288) (SEQ ID NO: 5) was constructed in a pET 15b vector (Novagen, Madison, Wis.) with mutations outlined by Chen et al. (Chen, C-H. J. et al., PNAS 97: 8233-8238 (2000)) that facilitate solubility of the enzyme and decrease oxidation.
  • the vector contained a T7 promoter, a 6-histidine tag at the amino terminus, and a thrombin cleavage site. Mutations C56S, W131D, F139D, F185K, and C280S were introduced using a QuickChange kit (Stratagene, San Diego, Calif.). The construct was confirmed through DNA sequencing.
  • the penta-mutant was expressed in E. coli BL21 (DE3) cells and induced with 1 mM isopropyl-1 thio- ⁇ -D-galactopyranoside (IPTG) when cells reached an optical density between 0.8-1.0 at 600 nm.
  • Cells were lysed in 20 mM HEPES (pH 7.5), 1.5 M NaCl, 5 mM imidazole, and 2 mM 2-mercaptoethanol.
  • the enzyme was purified following standard methods for histidine tagged proteins (Jenkins, T. M. et al., Journal of Biological Chemistry 271: 7712-7718 (1996)).
  • cell lysate was passed over a Ni-Nta column (Qiagen, Chatsworth, Calif.) with the 6-His tagged integrase protein eluted by adding 250 mM imidazole.
  • a G-25 Sepharose® column (Amersham Pharmacia, Piscataway, N.J.) was used to exchange the buffer prior to thrombin cleavage of the integrase protein and subsequent removal of thrombin using a benzamidine-Sepharose® 6B column.
  • the cleaved 6-His tag was separated from the integrase using a second Ni-Nta column.
  • the integrase was further purified with a heparin-Sepharose® column and a gradient of NaCl (0.4 to 1 M) in 20 mM HEPES (pH 7.5), 400 mM NaCl, and 1 mM DTT buffer.
  • the purified protein was dialyzed against 20 mM HEPES (pH 7.5), 800 mM NaCl, and 1 mM DTT and concentrated by stirred cell ultrafiltration (Millipore, Bedford, Mass.) or Ultra-free spin concentrators (Millipore, Bedford, Mass.) when required.
  • Viral DNA Bead Preparation Streptavidin-coated SPA beads were suspended to 20 mg/ml in 25 mM 3-morpholinopropanesulfonic acid (MOPS) (pH 7.2) and 0.1% NaN 3 . Biotinylated viral DNA was bound to the hydrated SPA beads in a batch process by combining 25 pmoles of ds-DNA to 1 mg of suspended SPA beads (10 ⁇ l of 50 ⁇ M viral DNA to 1 ml of 20 mg/ml SPA beads). The mixture was incubated at 22° C. for 20 min. with occasional mixing followed by centrifugation at about 2500 rpm for about 10 min. However, the centrifugation speed and time may vary depending upon the particular centrifuge and conditions.
  • MOPS 3-morpholinopropanesulfonic acid
  • the supernatant was removed and the beads suspended to 20 mg/ml in 25 mM MOPS (pH 7.2) and 0.1% NaN 3 .
  • the viral DNA beads were stable for more than 2 weeks when stored at 4° C.
  • Di-deoxy viral DNA was prepared in an identical manner to yield control di-deoxy viral DNA beads.
  • Assay buffer was made as a 10 ⁇ stock of 250 mM MOPS (pH 7.2), 250 mM NaCl, 50 mM 3-[(3-cholamidopropyl)dimethylammonio]-1-propanesulfonate (CHAPS), 0.5% (octylphenoxy)polyethoxyethanol (NP40) (IGEPAL-CA) and 0.05% NaN 3 .
  • Viral DNA beads were diluted to 2.67 mg/ml in 1 ⁇ assay buffer plus 3 mM MgCl 2 , 1% DMSO, and 10 mM fresh DTT.
  • Integrase was pre-complexed to viral DNA beads in a batch process (IN/viral DNA/bead complex) by combining diluted viral DNA beads with integrase at a concentration of 385 nM followed by a minimum incubation time of 15 min. at 22° C. The sample was kept at 22° C. until transferred to the assay wells. Long-term storage at 4° C. was possible, but not routinely applied.
  • Host DNA was prepared to 200 nM as a mixture of unlabeled and [ 3 H]T-labeled host DNA diluted in 1 ⁇ assay buffer plus 8.5 mM MgCl 2 and 15 mM DTT. Typical concentrations were about 10 nM to about 12 nM [ 3 H]T-labeled host DNA and about 188 nM to about 190 nM unlabeled host DNA. The ratio was adjusted relative to enzyme activity and specific activity of the [ 3 H]T-labeled host DNA to generate a SPA assay signal of 2000-3000 CPM in the absence of modulators such as inhibitors.
  • Strand-transfer Scintillation Proximity Assay The strand-transfer reaction was carried out in 384-well microtiter plates, though an identical protocol can be used for a 96-well plate format with a final enzymatic reaction volume of 50 ⁇ l. Five microliters of compounds or test reagents diluted in 10% DMSO were added to the assay wells followed by the addition of 32.5 ⁇ l of the IN/viral-DNA/bead complex. The strand-transfer reaction was initiated by adding 12.5 ⁇ l of host DNA with vigorous vortexing of the plates and transferring them to a humidified 37° C. incubator. An incubation time of 50 min.
  • the integrase strand-transfer reaction was terminated by adding 35 ⁇ l of stop buffer (150 mM EDTA, 90 mM NaOH, and 6 M CsCl) to the wells.
  • Components of the stop buffer function to terminate enzymatic activity (EDTA), dissociate integrase/DNA complexes in addition to separating non-integrated DNA strands (NaOH), and float the SPA beads to the surface of the wells to be in closer range to the PMT detectors of the TopCount® plate-based scintillation counter (PerkinElmer Life Sciences Inc. (Boston, Mass.)).
  • the assay signal was measured using a TopCount® plate-based scintillation counter with settings optimal for [ 3 H]-PVT SPA beads.
  • the TopCount® program incorporated a quench standardization curve to normalize data for color absorption of the compounds (color quench correction program (QstINT file). Data values for quench-corrected counts per minute (QCPM) were used to quantify integrase activity. Counting time was 30 sec./well for plates processed in HTS mode, and up to 2 min./well for plates containing purified compound.
  • the di-deoxy viral DNA beads were used to optimize the integrase strand-transfer reaction.
  • the di-deoxy termination of the viral ds-DNA sequence prevented productive integration of viral DNA into the host DNA by integrase.
  • the assay signal in the presence of di-deoxy viral DNA was a measure of non-specific interactions.
  • Assay parameters were optimized to where reactions with di-deoxy viral DNA beads gave an assay signal closely matched to the true background of the assay.
  • the true background of the assay was defined as a reaction with all assay components (viral DNA and [3H]-host DNA) in the absence of integrase.
  • Compounds were evaluated for integrase inhibitory activity using two different methods.
  • a high-throughput screening method was employed to test combinatorial compound libraries or synthetic compounds that were solvated and transferred to microtiter plates.
  • the percent inhibition of the compound was calculated using the equation (1 ⁇ ((QCPM sample ⁇ QCPM min)/(QCPM max ⁇ QCPM min))*100.
  • the min value is the assay signal in the presence of a known inhibitor at a concentration 100-fold higher than the IC 50 for that compound.
  • the min signal approximates the true background for the assay.
  • the max value is the assay signal obtained for the integrase-mediated activity in the absence of compound.
  • the IC 50 values of synthetic and purified combinatorial compounds were also determined. Compounds were prepared in 100% DMSO at 100-fold higher concentrations than desired for testing in assays, followed by dilution of the compounds in 100% DMSO to generate an 8-point titration curve with 1 ⁇ 2-log dilution intervals. The compound sample was further diluted 10-fold with water and transferred to the assay wells. The percentage inhibition for an inhibitory compound was determined as above with values applied to a nonlinear regression, sigmoidal dose response equation (variable slope) using GraphPad Prism curve fitting software (GraphPad Software, Inc., San Diego, Calif.).
  • test compounds were determined in HIV-1 cell protection assays using the RF strain of HIV-1, CEM-SS cells, and the XTT dye reduction method (Weislow, O. S. et al., J. Natl. Cancer Inst. 81: 577-586 (1989)).
  • Subject cells were infected with HIV-1 RF virus at an moi of 0.025 to 0.819 or mock infected with medium only and added at 2 ⁇ 10 4 cells per well into 96 well plates containing half-log dilutions of test compounds.
  • XTT (1 mg/ml XTT tetrazolium and 0.02 nM phenazine methosulfate) were added to the wells and the plates were reincubated for four hours. Viability, as determined by the amount of XTT formazan produced, was quantified spectrophotometrically by absorbance at 450 nm.
  • Data from CPE assays were expressed as the percent of formazan produced in compound-treated cells compared to formazan produced in wells of uninfected, compound-free cells.
  • the fifty percent effective concentration (EC 50 ) was calculated as the concentration of compound that affected an increase in the percentage of formazan production in infected, compound-treated cells to 50% of that produced by uninfected, compound-free cells.
  • the 50% cytotoxicity concentration (CC 50 ) was calculated as the concentration of compound that decreased the percentage of formazan produced in uninfected, compound-treated cells to 50% of that produced in uninfected, compound-free cells.
  • the therapeutic index was calculated by dividing the cytotoxicity (CC 50 ) by the antiviral activity (EC 50 ).

Landscapes

  • Organic Chemistry (AREA)
  • Chemical & Material Sciences (AREA)
  • Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
  • Life Sciences & Earth Sciences (AREA)
  • General Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
  • Public Health (AREA)
  • Medicinal Chemistry (AREA)
  • Nuclear Medicine, Radiotherapy & Molecular Imaging (AREA)
  • Chemical Kinetics & Catalysis (AREA)
  • Pharmacology & Pharmacy (AREA)
  • Veterinary Medicine (AREA)
  • Animal Behavior & Ethology (AREA)
  • General Chemical & Material Sciences (AREA)
  • Virology (AREA)
  • Communicable Diseases (AREA)
  • Oncology (AREA)
  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Bioinformatics & Cheminformatics (AREA)
  • AIDS & HIV (AREA)
  • Tropical Medicine & Parasitology (AREA)
  • Molecular Biology (AREA)
  • Pharmaceuticals Containing Other Organic And Inorganic Compounds (AREA)
  • Nitrogen Condensed Heterocyclic Rings (AREA)
  • Nitrogen And Oxygen Or Sulfur-Condensed Heterocyclic Ring Systems (AREA)

Abstract

Bicyclic hydroxamate compounds represented by the Formula I:
Figure US20080221154A1-20080911-C00001
are described. The bicyclic hydroxamate compounds and compositions containing those compounds may be used to inhibit or modulate an enzyme activity of HIV Integrase and to treat HIV mediated diseases and conditions.

Description

  • This application is a continuation of U.S. patent application Ser. No. 10/699,068, filed Oct. 30, 2003, which claims priority from U.S. Patent Application No. 60/422,513, filed Oct. 31, 2002, all of which are hereby incorporated by reference in their entirety.
  • The present invention is directed to bicyclic hydroxamates and pharmaceutically acceptable salts, pharmaceutically acceptable prodrugs, and pharmaceutically acceptable metabolites thereof, their synthesis, and their use as modulators or inhibitors of the HIV integrase enzyme. The compounds of the present invention are useful for modulating (e.g. inhibiting) an enzyme activity of HIV Integrase enzyme and for treating diseases or conditions mediated by human immunodeficiency virus (“HIV”), such as for example, acquired immunodeficiency syndrome (“AIDS”), and AIDS related complex (“ARC”).
  • BACKGROUND OF THE INVENTION
  • The retrovirus designated human immunodeficiency virus or “HIV” is the etiological agent of a complex disease that progressively destroys the immune system. The disease is known as acquired immune deficiency syndrome or AIDS. AIDS and other HIV-caused diseases are difficult to treat due to the ability of HIV to rapidly replicate, mutate and acquire resistance to drugs. To attempt to slow the spread of the virus after infection, treatment of AIDS and other HIV-caused diseases has focused on inhibiting HIV replication.
  • Since HIV is a retrovirus, and thus, encodes a positive-sense RNA strand, its mechanism of replication is based on the conversion of viral RNA to viral DNA, and subsequent insertion of the viral DNA into the host cell genome. HIV replication relies on three constitutive HIV encoded enzymes: reverse transcriptase (RT), protease and integrase.
  • Upon infection with HIV, the retroviral core particles bind to specific cellular receptors and gain entry into the host cell cytoplasm. Once inside the cytoplasm, viral RT catalyzes the reverse transcription of viral ssRNA to form viral RNA-DNA hybrids. The RNA strand from the hybrid is then partially degraded and a second DNA strand is synthesized resulting in viral dsDNA. Integrase, aided by viral and cellular proteins, then transports the viral dsDNA into the host cell nucleus as a component of the pre-integration complex (PIC). In addition, integrase provides the permanent attachment, i.e., integration, of the viral dsDNA to the host cell genome which, in turn, provides viral access to the host cellular machinery for gene expression. Following integration, transcription and translation produce viral precursor proteins. Protease then cleaves the viral precursor proteins into viral proteins which, after additional processing, are released from the host cell as newly infectious HIV particles.
  • A key step in HIV replication, insertion of the viral dsDNA into the host cell genome, is believed to be mediated by integrase in at least three, and possibly, four, steps: (1) assembly of proviral DNA; (2) 3′-end processing causing assembly of the PIC; (3) 3′-end joining or DNA strand transfer, i.e., integration; and (4) gap filling, a repair function. See, e.g., Goldgur, Y. et al., PNAS 96(23): 13040-13043 (November 1999); Sayasith, K. et al., Expert Opin. Ther. Targets 5(4): 443-464 (2001): Young, S. D., Curr. Opin. Drug Disc. & Devel. 4(4): 402-410 (2001); Wai, J. S. et al., J. Med. Chem. 43(26): 4923-4926 (2000); Debyser, Z. et al., Assays for the Evaluation of HIV-1 Integrase Inhibitors, from Methods in Molecular Biology 160: 139-155, Schein, C. H. (ed.), Humana Press Inc., Totowa, N. J. (2001); and Hazuda, D. et al., Drug Design and Disc. 13: 17-24 (1997).
  • In the first step, integrase forms a stable complex with the viral long terminal repeat (LTR) regions. Once the complex is formed, integrase then performs an endonucleolytic processing step whereby the terminal GT dinucleotides of the 3′ ends (immediately downstream from a conserved CA dinucleotide) of both DNA strands are cleaved. The processed DNA/integrase complex (the PIC) then translocates across the nuclear membrane. Once inside the host cell nucleus, integrase performs the third step, 3′-end joining, whereby a cut is made in the host cell DNA to covalently join the processed 3′-ends of the viral processed DNA during two transesterification reactions. In the fourth step, cellular enzymes repair the resultant gap at the site of viral DNA Insertion. The enzymes, if any, employed in the repair process have not been accurately identified. Sayasith, K. et al., Expert Opin. Ther. Targets 5(4): 443-464 (2001). Thus, the role that integrase plays in the gap filling function is not known.
  • It is clear that the role that integrase plays in the integration of the viral DNA into the host cell genome occurs through wellrdered reactions directed by various viral and cellular factors. This knowledge provides a variety of opportunities to block the essential step of integration (and the essential enzyme integrase) in the HIV life cycle.
  • Currently, AIDS and other HIV-caused disease are treated with an “HIV cocktail” containing multiple drugs including RT and protease inhibitors. However, numerous side effects and the rapid emergence of drug resistance limit the ability of the RT and protease inhibitors to safely and effectively treat AIDS and other HIV-caused diseases. In view of the shortcomings of RT and protease inhibitors, there is a need for another mechanism through which HIV replication can be inhibited. Integration, and thus integrase, a virally encoded enzyme with no mammalian counterpart, is a logical alternative. See, e.g., Wai, J. S. et al., J. Med. Chem. 43:4923-4926 (2000); Grobler, J. et al., PNAS 99: 6661-6666 (2002); Pais, G. C. G. et al., J. Med. Chem. 45: 3184-3194 (2002); Young, S. D., Curr. Opin. Drug Disc. & Devel. 4(4): 402-410 (2001); Godwin, C. G. et al., J. Med. Chem. 45: 3184-3194 (2002); Young, S. D. et al., “L-870,810: Discovery of a Potent HIV Integrase Inhibitor with Potential Clinical Utility,” Poster presented at the XIV International AIDS Conference, Barcelona (Jul. 7-12, 2002); and WO 02/070491.
  • It has been suggested that for an integrase inhibitor to function, it should inhibit the strand transfer integrase function. See, e.g., Young, S. D., Curr. Opin. Drug Disc. & Devel. 4(4): 402-410 (2001). Thus, there is a need for HIV inhibitors, specifically, integrase inhibitors, and, more specifically, strand transfer Inhibitors, to treat AIDS and other HIV-caused diseases. The inventive agents disclosed herein are novel, potent and selective HIV-integrase inhibitors, and, more specifically, strand transfer inhibitors, with high antiviral activity and low toxicity.
  • The references made to published documents throughout this application more fully describe the state of the art to which this invention pertains. The disclosures of these references are hereby incorporated by reference in their entireties.
  • SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION
  • The invention is directed to compounds represented by Formula I:
  • Figure US20080221154A1-20080911-C00002
  • wherein:
  • R1, R2 and R3 are each independently:
      • hydrogen; —C(O)ORc; or an alkyl, alkenyl, heteroalkyl, or haloalkyl group, unsubstituted or substituted with one or more substituents independently selected from the group consisting of:
        • halogens; —O—; —ORc; NRcRc; C(O)NRcRcNRcC(O)NRcRc; NRcC(O)Rc; NRcC(NRc)NRcRc; SRc; S(O)Rc; S(O)2Rc; S(O)2NRcRc; and alkyl, aryl, cycloalkyl, heteroaryl, and alkoxy-heteroaryl groups, unsubstituted or substituted by one or more substituents independently selected from the group consisting of
          • halogens; —C(Rc)3; —OH; and alkyl, alkenyl, aryl and heteroaryl groups, unsubstituted or substituted with one or more independently selected Rc groups,
      • where Rc is one or more substituents independently selected from the group consisting of: halogens; hydrogen; OH; unsubstituted alkyl; unsubstituted alkenyl; unsubstituted alkynyl; unsubstituted aryl; unsubstituted cycloalkyl; unsubstituted heterocycloalkyl; unsubstituted heteroaryl; aryl and heteroaryl groups substituted with one or more substituents independently selected from the group consisting of halogen and alkyl; or two or more Rc groups together cyclize to form part of a heteroaryl or heterocycloalkyl group unsubstituted or substituted with an unsubstituted alkyl group;
  • R4 is hydrogen or an alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, heteroalkyl, or haloalkyl group, unsubstituted or substituted with —ORd where Rd is an unsubstituted alkyl group;
  • R5 is hydrogen or an alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, heteroalkyl, or haloalkyl group;
  • R6 is hydrogen or an alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, heteroalkyl, or haloalkyl group, unsubstituted or substituted with an aryl group;
  • R4 and R6 together with the N to which R5 is attached cyclize to form the following compound represented by the Formula Id:
  • Figure US20080221154A1-20080911-C00003
      • wherein R12 and R13 are each independently:
        • hydrogen; —C(O)ORc; or an alkyl, alkenyl, heteroalkyl, or haloalkyl group, unsubstituted or substituted with one or more substituents independently selected from the group consisting of:
          • halogens; —O—; —ORc; NRcRc; C(O)NRcRc; NRcC(O)NRcRc; NRcC(O)Rc; NRcC(NRc)NRcRc; SRc; S(O)Rc; S(O)2Rc; S(O)2NRcRc; and alkyl, aryl, cycloalkyl, heteroaryl, and alkoxy-heteroaryl groups, unsubstituted or substituted by one or more substituents independently selected from the group consisting of:
            • halogens; —C(Rc)3; —OH; and alkyl, alkenyl, aryl and heteroaryl groups, unsubstituted or substituted with one or more independently selected Rc, groups,
        • where Rc is one or more substituents independently selected from the group consisting of: halogens; hydrogen; unsubstituted alkyl; unsubstituted alkenyl; unsubstituted alkynyl; unsubstituted aryl; unsubstituted cycloalkyl; unsubstituted heterocycloalkyl; unsubstituted heteroaryl; aryl and heteroaryl groups substituted with one or more substituents independently selected from the group consisting of halogen and alkyl; or two or more Rc, groups together cyclize to form part of a heteroaryl or heterocycloalkyl group unsubstituted or substituted with an unsubstituted alkyl group; and
      • n is 1, 2 or 3;
  • R7 is hydrogen or an alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, heteroalkyl, haloalkyl, aryl, cycloalkyl, heterocycloalkyl or heteroaryl group, unsubstituted or substituted with one or more substituents independently selected from the group consisting of:
      • halogens; and aryl, cycloalkyl, heterocycloalkyl, and heteroaryl groups, unsubstituted or substituted with one or more halogen groups;
  • X is C or N;
  • Y is C or N;
  • Z is C or N; and
  • there is a double bond between X and the 6-membered ring and Z and the 6-membered ring; or between X and Y; or between Y and Z;
  • or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, pharmaceutically acceptable prodrug, or a pharmaceutically active metabolite thereof.
  • In another aspect, the invention is directed to compounds represented by Formula I:
  • Figure US20080221154A1-20080911-C00004
  • wherein:
  • R1 is hydrogen or —C(O)ORc, where Rc is an unsubstituted alkyl, unsubstituted alkenyl, or unsubstituted alkynyl group;
  • R2 is hydrogen or an alkyl, alkenyl, or heteroalkyl group, unsubstituted or substituted with one or more substituents independently selected from the group consisting of:
      • —O—; —NRdRd; —ORd; halogens; and an aryl group, unsubstituted or substituted with one or more substituents independently selected from the group consisting of:
        • halogens; —C(Rd)3; unsubstituted alkyl, alkyl-Rd, alkenyl-Rd, and aryl groups,
          where Rd is one or more substituents independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen; unsubstituted alkyl, unsubstituted alkenyl, and unsubstituted aryl groups;
  • R3 is hydrogen or an alkyl, alkenyl, or heteroalkyl group, unsubstituted or substituted with one or more substituents independently selected from the group consisting of:
      • —O—; —ORe; and, alkyl, aryl, cycloalkyl, and heteroaryl groups, unsubstituted or substituted with one or more substituents independently selected from the group consisting of:
        • halogens; —H; and aryl or heteroaryl groups, substituted with one or more Re substituents,
          where Re is one or more substituents independently selected from the group consisting of halogens; hydrogen; OH; unsubstituted alkyl; and aryl unsubstituted or substituted with one or more substituents independently selected from the group consisting of halogen and alkyl;
  • R4 is hydrogen or an alkyl group, unsubstituted or substituted with —ORf, where Rf is an unsubstituted alkyl group;
  • R5 is hydrogen or an alkyl group;
  • R6 is hydrogen or an alkyl group unsubstituted or substituted with an aryl group;
  • R4 and R6 together with the N to which R6 is attached cyclize to form the following compound represented by the Formula Id:
  • Figure US20080221154A1-20080911-C00005
      • wherein R12 and R13 are each independently hydrogen; and
      • n is 1;
  • R7 is hydrogen or an alkyl, alkenyl, or aryl group, unsubstituted or substituted with an aryl group, unsubstituted or substituted with one or more halogens;
  • X is C or N;
  • Y is C;
  • Z is C or N; and
  • there is a double bond between X and the 6-membered ring and Z and the 6-membered ring; or between X and Y; or between Y and Z;
  • or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt pharmaceutically acceptable prodrug, or a pharmaceutically active metabolite thereof.
  • In yet another aspect, the invention is directed to compounds of the Formula I:
  • Figure US20080221154A1-20080911-C00006
  • where
  • R1 is hydrogen or —C(O)O-ethyl;
  • R2 is hydrogen, methyl, ethyl, propyl, vinyl, allyl, or benzyl, unsubstituted or substituted with one or more substituents independently selected from the group consisting of:
      • halogens, —, OH, amino, and phenyl, unsubstituted or substituted with one or more substituents selected from the group consisting of:
        • methyl, ethyl, phenyl, benzyl, 2-phenylethyl, 3-phenylallyl, and 2-phenylvinyl;
  • R3 is methyl, ethyl, butyl, or benzyl, unsubstituted or substituted with one or more substituents independently selected from the group consisting of:
      • halogens, OH, methyl, cyclohexyl, —, thiadiazole, thiophenyl, and phenoxy, unsubstituted or substituted with one or more substituents independently selected from the group consisting of:
        • halogens, phenyl, and ethoxy;
  • R4 is hydrogen, methyl or methoxymethyl;
  • R5 is hydrogen or methyl;
  • R6 is hydrogen, methyl, or benzyl;
  • R7 is hydrogen, methyl, benzyl, phenyl, allyl, or tert-butyl, unsubstituted or substituted with one or more halogens; and
  • R4 and R6 together with the N to which R6 attaches cyclize to form a pyrrole-2-one.
  • The invention is also directed to compounds having the Formula I:
  • Figure US20080221154A1-20080911-C00007
  • where
  • R1 is hydrogen or —C(O)O-ethyl;
  • R2 is selected from hydrogen; hydroxymethyl; methoxymethyl; ethoxymethyl; 2-phenylvinyl; 3-phenylprop-1-enyl; [(2-phenylvinyl)oxy]methyl; dimethylaminomethyl; benzyloxymethyl; 4-fluorobenzyl; 2-phenylvinyl; 2-phenylethyl; 3-phenylpropyl; 2-phenylethoxymethyl; [(phenylprop-2-enyl)oxy]methyl; [(3-phenylallyl)oxy]methyl; methyl; ethyl; and allyl;
  • R3 is selected from hydrogen; 2,4-difluorobenzyl; 2,3-difluorobenzyl; 4-fluorobenzyl; 3-chloro-2,6-difluorobenzyl; 3-chloro-5-fluoro-2-hydroxybenzyl; 5-chloro-thiophen-2-ylmethyl; 3-chloro-2-fluorobenzyl; 2,3-dichlorobenzyl; 5-ethoxy-[1,2,3]thiadiazol-4-ylmethyl; 3-methyl-butyl; 2-cyclohexyl-ethyl; 2,4-difluoro-phenoxymethyl; 3,5-difluoro-2-hydroxybenzyl; 2-chloro-4-fluoro-phenoxymethyl; 3-chloro-5-fluoro-2-hydroxybenzyl; 4-fluoro-phenoxymethyl; 5-fluoro-2-hydroxy-benzyl; 2,3,4-trifluoro-phenoxymethyl; 3,4,5-trifluoro-2-hydroxybenzyl; 2-chloro-phenoxymethyl; and 5-chloro-2-hydroxy-benzyl;
  • R4 is hydrogen, methyl or methoxymethyl;
  • R5 is hydrogen or methyl;
  • R6 is hydrogen, methyl, or benzyl;
  • R7 is hydrogen, methyl, benzyl, phenyl, pentafluorobenzyl, allyl, tert-butyl; and
  • R4 and R6 together with the N to which R6 attaches cyclize to form a pyrrol-2-one.
  • Inventive compounds represented by the Formula I include, but are not limited to, the following compounds represented by Formula Ia, Ib, Ic and Ie:
  • Figure US20080221154A1-20080911-C00008
  • In addition to compounds of Formula I, (including Formula Ia, Ib, Ic and Ie), the invention is also directed to pharmaceutically acceptable salts, pharmaceutically acceptable prodrugs, and pharmaceutically active metabolites of such compounds, and pharmaceutically acceptable salts of such metabolites. Such compounds, salts, prodrugs and metabolites are at times collectively referred to herein as “HIV Integrase agents.”
  • The invention also relates to pharmaceutical compositions each comprising a therapeutically effective amount of an HIV Integrase agent of the invention in combination with a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier, diluent or carrier therefore.
  • Additionally, the invention is directed to methods of inhibiting or modulating an enzyme activity of HIV Integrase, comprising contacting the enzyme with an effective amount of at least one HIV Integrase agent.
  • The invention also relates to methods of treating a disease or condition mediated by HIV, comprising administering to a mammal in need of such treatment a therapeutically effective amount of at least one HIV Integrase agent. The disease or condition mediated by HIV may be, for example, AIDS or ARC.
  • In another aspect, the invention is directed to methods of evaluating the HIV integrase modulatory activity of a test compound, comprising:
  • a) immobilizing viral DNA on a surface, wherein the viral DNA has been modified to contain a CA base pair overhang at the 5′ end;
  • b) adding integrase to the immobilized DNA;
  • c) adding a test compound to the immobilized viral DNA/integrase mixture;
  • d) obtaining target DNA radiolabeled at both 3′ ends of the ds-DNA;
  • e) combining the immobilized viral DNA/integrase/compound mixture with the radiolabeled target DNA to initiate a reaction;
  • f) stopping the reaction by adding a stop buffer to the combination of (e); and
  • g) reading the assay results in a scintillation counter to determine whether the test compound modulates the activity of the integrase.
  • Other aspects, features, and advantages of the invention will become apparent from the detailed description of the invention and its preferred embodiments.
  • DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF THE INVENTION AND PREFERRED EMBODIMENTS
  • The compounds of Formula I are useful for modulating or inhibiting HIV Integrase enzyme. More particularly, the compounds of Formula I are useful as modulators or inhibitors of HIV Integrase activity, and thus are useful for the prevention and/or treatment of HIV mediated diseases or conditions (e.g., AIDS, and ARC), alone or in combination with other known antiviral agents.
  • DEFINITIONS
  • As used herein, the terms “comprising” and “including” are used herein in their open, non-limiting sense.
  • The term “alkyl” refers to a straight- or branched-chain alkyl group having from 1 to 12 carbon atoms in the chain. Exemplary alkyl groups include methyl (Me, which also may be structurally depicted by “/”), ethyl (Et), n-propyl, isopropyl, butyl, isobutyl, sec-butyl, tert-butyl (tBu), pentyl, isopentyl, neo-pentyl, hexyl, isohexyl, and the like.
  • The term “heteroalkyl” refers to a straight- or branched-chain alkyl group having from 2 to 12 atoms in the chain, one or more of which is a heteroatom selected from S, O, and N. Exemplary heteroalkyls include alkyl ethers, secondary and tertiary alkyl amines, alkyl sulfides, and the like.
  • The term “alkenyl” refers to a straight- or branched-chain alkenyl group having from 2 to 12 carbon atoms in the chain. Illustrative alkenyl groups include prop-2-enyl, but-2-enyl, but-3-enyl, 2-methylprop-2-enyl, hex-2-enyl, and the like.
  • The term “alkynyl” refers to a straight- or branched-chain alkynyl group having from 2 to 12 carbon atoms in the chain. Illustrative alkynyl groups include prop-2-ynyl, but-2-ynyl, but-3-ynyl, 2-methylbut-2-ynyl, hex-2-ynyl, and the like.
  • The term “haloalkyl” refers to a straight- or branched-chain alkyl or alkenyl group having from 2-12 carbon atoms in the chain and where one or more hydrogens is substituted with a halogen. Illustrative haloalkyl groups include trifluoromethyl, 2-bromopropyl, 3-chlorohexyl, 1-iodo-isobutyl, and the like.
  • The term “aryl” (Ar) refers to a monocyclic, or fused or spiro polycyclic, aromatic carbocycle (ring structure having ring atoms that are all carbon) having from 3 to 12 ring atoms per ring. Illustrative examples of aryl groups include the following moieties:
  • Figure US20080221154A1-20080911-C00009
  • and the like.
  • The term “heteroaryl” (heteroAr) refers to a monocyclic, or fused or spiro polycyclic, aromatic heterocycle (ring structure having ring atoms selected from carbon atoms as well as nitrogen, oxygen, and sulfur heteroatoms) having from 3 to 12 ring atoms per ring. Illustrative examples of aryl groups include the following moieties:
  • Figure US20080221154A1-20080911-C00010
  • and the like.
  • The term cycloalkyl refers to a saturated or partially saturated, monocyclic or fused or spiro polycyclic, carbocycle having from 3 to 12 ring atoms per ring. Illustrative examples of cycloalkyl groups include the following moieties:
  • Figure US20080221154A1-20080911-C00011
  • and the like.
  • A “heterocycloalkyl” refers to a monocyclic, or fused or spiro polycyclic, ring structure that is saturated or partially saturated and has from 3 to 12 ring atoms per ring selected from C atoms and N, O, and S heteroatoms. Illustrative examples of heterocycloalkyl groups include:
  • Figure US20080221154A1-20080911-C00012
  • and the like.
  • The term “halogen(s)” represents chlorine, fluorine, bromine or iodine. The term “halo” represents chloro, fluoro, bromo or iodo.
  • The term “substituted” means that the specified group or moiety bears one or more substituents. The term “unsubstituted” means that the specified group bears no substituents. The term “optionally substituted” means that the specified group is unsubstituted or substituted by one or more substituents.
  • HIV Integrase Agents
  • HIV Integrase agents in accordance with the invention include active tautomeric and stereoisomeric forms of the compounds of Formula I, which may be readily obtained using techniques known in the art. For example, optically active (R) and (S) isomers may be prepared via a stereospecific synthesis, e.g., using chiral synthons and chiral reagents, or racemic mixtures may be resolved using conventional techniques.
  • It is understood that while a compound may exhibit the phenomenon of tautomerism, the formula drawings within this specification expressly depict only one of the possible tautomeric forms. It is therefore to be understood that a formula is intended to represent any tautomeric form of the depicted compound and is not to be limited merely to a specific compound form depicted by the structural formula.
  • It is also understood that a compound of Formula I may exist as an “E” or “Z” configurational isomer, or a mixture of E and Z isomers. It is therefore to be understood that a formula is intended to represent any configurational form of the depicted compound and is not to be limited merely to a specific compound form depicted by the formula drawings.
  • Some of the Inventive compounds may exist as single stereoisomers (i.e., essentially free of other stereoisomers), racemates, and/or mixtures of enantiomers and/or diastereomers. All such single stereoisomers, racemates and mixtures thereof are intended to be within the scope of the present invention. In one preferred embodiment, the inventive compounds that are optically active are used in optically pure form.
  • As generally understood by those skilled in the art, an optically pure compound having one chiral center (i.e., one asymmetric carbon atom) is one that consists essentially of one of the two possible enantiomers (i.e., is enantiomerically pure), and an optically pure compound having more than one chiral center is one that is both diastereomerically pure and enantiomerically pure. Preferably, the compounds of the present invention are used in a form that is at least 90% optically pure, that is, a form that contains at least 90% of a single isomer (80% enantiomeric excess (‘e.e.’) or diastereomeric excess (‘d.e.’)), more preferably at least 95% (90% e.e. or d.e.), even more preferably at least 97.5% (95% e.e. or d.e.), and most preferably at least 99% (98% e.e. or d.e.).
  • Additionally, Formula I is intended to cover, where applicable, solvated as well as unsolvated forms of the compounds. Thus, each formula includes compounds having the indicated structure, including the hydrated as well as the non-hydrated forms.
  • In addition to compounds of the Formula I, the HIV Integrase agents of the invention include pharmaceutically acceptable salts, prodrugs, and active metabolites of such compounds, and pharmaceutically acceptable salts of such metabolites. A “pharmaceutically acceptable prodrug” is a compound that may be converted under physiological conditions or by solvolysis to the specified compound or to a pharmaceutically acceptable salt of such compound. A “pharmaceutically active metabolite” is a pharmacologically active product produced through metabolism in the body of a specified compound or salt thereof, Prodrugs and active metabolites of a compound may be identified using routine techniques known in the art. See, e.g., Bertolini et al., J. Med. Chem., 40, 2011-2016 (1997); Shan et al., J. Pharm. Sci., 86(7), 765-767 (1997); Bagshawe, Drug Dev. Res., 34, 220-230 (1995); Bodor, Advances in Drug Res., 13, 224-331 (1984); Bundgaard, Design of Prodrugs (Elsevier Press 1985); Larsen, Design and Application of Prodrugs, Drug Design and Development (Krogsgaard-Larsen et al. eds., Harwood Academic Publishers, 1991); Dear et al., J. Chromatogr. B, 748, 281-293 (2000); Spraul et al., J. Pharmaceutical & Biomedical Analysis, 10(8), 601-605 (1992); and Prox et al., Xenobiol., 3(2), 103-112 (1992).
  • The term “pharmaceutically acceptable salts” refers to salt forms that are pharmacologically acceptable and substantially non-toxic to the subject being administered the HIV Integrase agent. Pharmaceutically acceptable salts include conventional acid-addition salts or base-addition salts formed from suitable non-toxic organic or inorganic acids or inorganic bases. Exemplary acid-addition salts include those derived from inorganic acids such as hydrochloric acid, hydrobromic acid, hydroiodic acid, sulfuric acid, sulfamic acid, phosphoric acid, and nitric acid, and those derived from organic acids such as p-toluenesulfonic acid, methanesulfonic acid, ethane-disulfonic acid, isothionic acid, oxalic acid, p-bromophenylsulfonic acid, carbonic acid, succinic acid, citric acid, benzoic acid, 2-acetoxybenzoic acid, acetic acid, phenylacetic acid, propionic acid, glycolic acid, stearic acid, lactic acid, malic acid, tartaric acid, ascorbic acid, maleic acid, hydroxymaleic acid, glutamic acid, salicylic acid, sulfanilic acid, and fumaric acid. Exemplary base-addition salts include those derived from ammonium hydroxides (e.g., a quaternary ammonium hydroxide such as tetramethylammonium hydroxide), those derived from inorganic bases such as alkali or alkaline earth-metal (e.g., sodium, potassium, lithium, calcium, or magnesium) hydroxides, and those derived from organic bases such as amines, benzylamines, piperidines, and pyrrolidines.
  • If the inventive compound is a base, the desired pharmaceutically acceptable salt may be prepared by any suitable method available in the art, for example, treatment of the free base with an inorganic acid, such as hydrochloric acid, hydrobromic acid, sulfuric acid, nitric acid, phosphoric acid and the like, or with an organic acid, such as acetic acid, maleic acid, succinic acid, mandelic acid, fumaric acid, malonic acid, pyruvic acid, oxalic acid, glycolic acid, salicylic acid, a pyranosidyl acid, such as glucuronic acid or galacturonic acid, an alpha-hydroxy acid, such as citric acid or tartaric acid, an amino acid, such as aspartic acid or glutamic acid, an aromatic acid, such as benzoic acid or cinnamic acid, a sulfonic acid, such as p-toluenesulfonic acid or ethanesulfonic acid, or the like.
  • If the inventive compound is an acid, the desired pharmaceutically acceptable salt may be prepared by any suitable method, for example, treatment of the free acid with an inorganic or organic base, such as an amine (primary, secondary or tertiary), an alkali metal hydroxide or alkaline earth metal hydroxide, or the like. Illustrative examples of suitable salts include organic salts derived from amino acids, such as glycine and arginine, ammonia, primary, secondary, and tertiary amines, and cyclic amines, such as piperidine, morpholine and piperazine, and inorganic salts derived from sodium, calcium, potassium, magnesium, manganese, iron, copper, zinc, aluminum and lithium.
  • In the case of agents that are solids, it is understood by those skilled in the art that the inventive compounds, agents and salts may exist in different crystal or polymorphic forms, all of which are intended to be within the scope of the present invention and specified formulas.
  • Preferred HIV Integrase Agents
  • Preferred HIV Integrase agents of the invention include compounds represented by Formula I:
  • Figure US20080221154A1-20080911-C00013
  • wherein:
  • R1 is hydrogen or —C(O)ORc, where Rc is an unsubstituted alkyl, unsubstituted alkenyl, or unsubstituted alkynyl group;
  • R2 is hydrogen or an alkyl, alkenyl, or heteroalkyl group, unsubstituted or substituted with one or more substituents independently selected from the group consisting of:
      • —O—; —NRdRd; —ORd; halogens; and an aryl group, unsubstituted or substituted with one or more substituents independently selected from the group consisting of:
        • halogens; —C(Rd)3; unsubstituted alkyl, alkyl-Rd, alkenyl-Rd, and aryl groups,
          where Rd is one or more substituents independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen; unsubstituted alkyl, unsubstituted alkenyl, and unsubstituted aryl groups;
  • R3 is hydrogen or an alkyl, alkenyl, or heteroalkyl group, unsubstituted or substituted with one or more substituents independently selected from the group consisting of:
      • —O—; —ORe; and, alkyl, aryl, cycloalkyl, and heteroaryl groups, unsubstituted or substituted with one or more substituents independently selected from the group consisting of:
        • halogens; —H; and aryl or heteroaryl groups, substituted with one or more Re substituents,
          where Re is one or more substituents independently selected from the group consisting of halogens; hydrogen; OH; unsubstituted alkyl; and aryl unsubstituted or substituted with one or more substituents independently selected from the group consisting of halogen and alkyl;
  • R4 is hydrogen or an alkyl group, unsubstituted or substituted with —ORf, where Rf is an unsubstituted alkyl group;
  • R5 is hydrogen or an alkyl group;
  • R6 is hydrogen or an alkyl group unsubstituted or substituted with an aryl group;
  • R4 and R6 together with the N to which R6 is attached cyclize to form the following compound represented by the Formula Id:
  • Figure US20080221154A1-20080911-C00014
      • wherein R12 and R13 are each independently hydrogen; and
      • n is 1;
  • R7 is hydrogen or an alkyl, alkenyl, or aryl group, unsubstituted or substituted with an aryl group, unsubstituted or substituted with one or more halogens;
  • X is C or N;
  • Y is C;
  • Z is C or N; and
  • there is a double bond between X and the 6-membered ring and Z and the 6-membered ring; or between X and Y; or between Y and Z;
  • or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, pharmaceutically acceptable prodrug, or a pharmaceutically active metabolite thereof.
  • More preferred are HIV Integrase agents of the Formula I, where
  • R1 is hydrogen or —C(O)O-ethyl;
  • R2 is hydrogen, methyl, ethyl, propyl, vinyl, allyl, or benzyl, unsubstituted or substituted with one or more substituents independently selected from the group consisting of:
      • halogens, —O—, OH, amino, and phenyl, unsubstituted or substituted with one or more substituents selected from the group consisting of:
        • methyl, ethyl, phenyl, benzyl, 2-phenylethyl, 3-phenylallyl, and 2-phenylvinyl;
  • R3 is methyl, ethyl, butyl, or benzyl, unsubstituted or substituted with one or more substituents independently selected from the group consisting of:
      • halogens, OH, methyl, cyclohexyl, —O—, thiadiazole, thiophenyl, and phenoxy, unsubstituted or substituted with one or more substituents independently selected from the group consisting of:
        • halogens, phenyl, and ethoxy;
  • R4 is hydrogen, methyl or methoxymethyl;
  • R5 is hydrogen or methyl;
  • R6 is hydrogen, methyl, or benzyl;
  • R7 is hydrogen, methyl, benzyl, phenyl, allyl, or tert-butyl, unsubstituted or substituted with one or more halogens; and
  • R4 and R6 together with the N to which R6 attaches cyclize to form a pyrrole-2-one.
  • Even more preferred are HIV Integrase agents of the Formula I, where
  • R1 is hydrogen or —C(O)O-ethyl;
  • R2 is selected from
      • hydrogen;
      • hydroxymethyl;
      • methoxymethyl;
      • ethoxymethyl;
      • 2-phenylvinyl;
      • 3-phenylprop-1-enyl;
      • [(2-phenylvinyl)oxy]methyl;
      • dimethylaminomethyl;
      • benzyloxymethyl;
      • 4-fluorobenzyl;
      • 2-phenylvinyl;
      • 2-phenylethyl;
      • 3-phenylpropyl;
      • 2-phenylethoxymethyl;
      • [(phenylprop-2-enyl)oxy]methyl;
      • [(3-phenylallyl)oxy]methyl;
      • methyl;
      • ethyl; and
      • allyl;
  • R3 is selected from
      • hydrogen;
      • 2,4-difluorobenzyl;
      • 2,3-difluorobenzyl;
      • 4-fluorobenzyl;
      • 3-chloro-2,6-difluorobenzyl;
      • 3-chloro-5-fluoro-2-hydroxybenzyl;
      • 5-chloro-thiophen-2-ylmethyl;
      • 3-chloro-2-fluorobenzyl;
      • 2,3-dichlorobenzyl;
      • 5-ethoxy-[1,2,3]thiadiazol-4-ylmethyl;
      • 3-methyl-butyl;
      • 2-cyclohexyl-ethyl;
      • 2,4-difluoro-phenoxymethyl;
      • 3,5-difluoro-2-hydroxybenzyl;
      • 2-chloro-4-fluoro-phenoxymethyl;
      • 3-chloro-5-fluoro-2-hydroxybenzyl;
      • 4-fluoro-phenoxymethyl;
      • 5-fluoro-2-hydroxy-benzyl;
      • 2,3,4-trifluoro-phenoxymethyl;
      • 3,4,5-trifluoro-2-hydroxybenzyl;
      • 2-chloro-phenoxymethyl; and
      • 5-chloro-2-hydroxy-benzyl;
  • R4 is hydrogen, methyl or methoxymethyl;
  • R5 is hydrogen or methyl;
  • R6 is hydrogen, methyl, or benzyl;
  • R7 is hydrogen, methyl, benzyl, phenyl, pentafluorobenzyl, allyl, tert-butyl;
  • R4 and R6 together with the N to which R6 attaches cyclize to form a pyrrol-2-one.
  • Most preferred are the compounds set forth in the examples below, including the following compounds:
    • 1-(2,4-Difluorobenzyl)-N-hydroxy-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-c]pyridine-5-carboxamide:
    • 1-(2,4-Difluorobenzyl)-N-hydroxy-N-methyl-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-c]pyridine-5-carboxamide:
    • 1-(4-Fluorobenzyl)-N-hydroxy-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-c]pyridine-5-carboxamide;
    • 1-(4-Fluorobenzyl)-N-hydroxy-N-methyl-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-c]pyridine-5-carboxamide;
    • N-Benzyl-1-(4-fluorobenzyl)-N-hydroxy-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-c]pyridine-5-carboxamide;
    • 1-(3-chloro-2,6-difluorobenzyl)-N-hydroxy-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-c]pyridine-5-carboxamide;
    • 1-(5-Chloro-thiophen-2-ylmethyl)-N-hydroxy-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-c]pyridine-5-carboxamide;
    • 1-(3-Chloro-2-fluorobenzyl)-N-hydroxy-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-c]pyridine-5-carboxamide;
    • 1-(2,3-Dichlorobenzyl)-N-hydroxy-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-c]pyridine-5-carboxamide;
    • 1-(5-Ethoxy-[1,2,3]thiadiazol-4-ylmethyl)-N-hydroxy-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-c]pyridine-5-carboxamide;
    • 1-(2,4-Difluorobenzyl)-N-hydroxy-4-methyl-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-c]pyridine-5-carboxamide;
    • 1-(2,4-Difluorobenzyl)-3-ethoxymethyl-N-hydroxy-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-c]pyridine-5-carboxamide;
    • 1-(2,4-Difluorobenzyl)-N-hydroxy-3-hydroxymethyl-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-c]pyridine-5-carboxamide;
    • 1-(2,4-Difluorobenzyl)-3-dimethylaminomethyl-N-hydroxy-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-c]pyridine-5-carboxamide;
    • 3-Benzyloxymethyl-1-(2,4-difluorobenzyl)-N-hydroxy-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-c]pyridine-5-carboxamide;
    • 3-(2,4-Difluorobenzyl)-N-hydroxy-3H-imidazo[4,5-c]pyridine-6-carboxamide;
    • 1-(2,4-Difluorobenzyl)-N-hydroxy-1H-imidazo[4,5-c]pyridine-6-carboxamide;
    • 1-(2,4-Difluorobenzyl)-3-ethoxymethyl-N-hydroxy-N-methyl-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-c]pyridine-5-carboxamide;
    • 1-(2,4-Difluorobenzyl)-N-hydroxy-3-hydroxymethyl-N-methyl-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-c]pyridine-5-carboxamide;
    • 1-(2,4-Difluorobenzyl)-3-dimethylaminomethyl-N-hydroxy-N-methyl-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-c]pyridine-5-carboxamide;
    • 1-(2,4-Difluorobenzyl)-N-methoxy-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-c]pyridine-5-carboxamide;
    • 1-(2,4-Difluorobenzyl)-3-ethoxymethyl-N-methoxy-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-c]pyridine-5-carboxamide;
    • 1-(2,4-Difluorobenzyl)-3-hydroxymethyl-N-methoxy-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-c]pyridine-5-carboxamide;
    • 1-(2,4-Difluorobenzyl)-3-dimethylaminomethyl-N-methoxy-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-c]pyridine-5-carboxamide;
    • N-Benzyloxy-1-(2,4-difluorobenzyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-c]pyridine-5-carboxamide;
    • N-Benzyloxy-3-(4-fluorobenzyl)-3H-imidazo[4,5-c]pyridine-6-carboxamide;
    • 3-(4-Fluorobenzyl)-N-methoxy-3H-imidazo[4,5-c]pyridine-6-carboxamide;
    • 3-(4-Fluorobenzyl)-N-phenoxy-3H-imidazo[4,5-c]pyridine-6-carboxamide;
    • 3-(4-Fluorobenzyl)-N-[(pentafluorobenzyl)oxy]-3H-imidazo[4,5-c]pyridine-carboxamide;
    • N-(Allyloxy)-3-(4-fluorobenzyl)-3H-imidazo[4,5-c]pyridine-6-carboxamide;
    • 6-(2,4-Difluorobenzyl)-2-hydroxy-1,6-dihydrodipyrrolo[3,2-d:3′,4′-b]pyridin-3(2H)-one;
    • 3-(2,3-Difluorobenzyl)-N-phenoxy-3H-imidazo[4,5-c]pyridine-6-carboxamide;
    • 3-(2,3-Difluorobenzyl)-N-methoxy-3H-imidazo[4,5-c]pyridine-6-carboxamide;
    • N-Allyloxy-3-(2,3-difluorobenzyl)-3H-imidazo[4,5-c]pyridine-6-carboxamide;
    • 1-(4-Fluorobenzyl)-N-phenoxy-1H-imidazo[4,5-c]pyridine-6-carboxamide;
    • N-tert-Butoxy-3-(2,3-difluorobenzyl)-3H-imidazo[4,5-c]pyridine-6-carboxamide;
    • N-Methoxy-3-(3-methyl-butyl)-3H-imidazo[4,5-c]pyridine-6-carboxamide;
    • 3-(3-Methyl-butyl)-N-phenoxy-3H-imidazo[4,5-c]pyridine-6-carboxamide;
    • 3-(2-Cyclohexyl-ethyl)-N-phenoxy-3H-imidazo[4,5-c]pyridine-6-carboxamide:
    • 3-(2-Cyclohexyl-ethyl)-N-methoxy-3H-imidazo[4,6-c]pyridine-6-carboxamide;
    • N-Allyloxy-3-(2-cyclohexyl-ethyl)-3H-imidazo[4,5-c]pyridine-6-carboxamide;
    • 1-(2,4-Difluorobenzyl)-N-hydroxy-4-methoxymethyl-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-c]pyridine-5-carboxamide;
    • 1-(2,4-Difluorobenzyl)-N-hydroxy-3-(2-phenylvinyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-c]pyridine-5-carboxamide;
    • 1-(2,4-Difluorobenzyl)-N-hydroxy-3-(3-phenylprop-1-enyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-c]pyridine-5-carboxamide;
    • 1-(2,4-Difluorobenzyl)-N-hydroxy-3-(2-phenylethyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-c]pyridine-5-carboxamide;
    • 1-(2,4-Difluorobenzyl)-N-hydroxy-3-(3-phenylpropyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-c]pyridine-5-carboxamide;
    • 1-(2,4-Difluorobenzyl)-N-hydroxy-3-{[(2-phenylethyl)oxy]methyl}-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-c]pyridine-5-carboxamide;
    • 1-(2,4-Difluorobenzyl)-N-hydroxy-3-{[(3-phenylallyl)oxy]methyl}-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-c]pyridine-5-carboxamide;
    • 1-(2,4-Difluorobenzyl)-N-hydroxy-3-methyl-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-c]pyridine-5-carboxamide;
    • 1-(2,4-Difluorobenzyl)-3-ethyl-N-hydroxy-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-c]pyridine-5-carboxamide;
    • 3-Allyl-1-(2,4-difluorobenzyl)-N-hydroxy-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-c]pyridine-5-carboxamide;
    • 1-(2,4-Difluorobenzyl)-N-hydroxy-7-methyl-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-c]pyridine-5-carboxamide;
    • Ethyl 1-(2,4-Difluorobenzyl)-5-hydroxycarbamoyl-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-c]pyridine-2-carboxylate;
    • 3-(2,4-Difluoro-phenoxymethyl)-1-ethyl-N-hydroxy-1H-pyrrolo[3,2-c]pyridine-carboxamide;
    • 3-(3,5-Difluoro-2-hydroxybenzyl)-1-ethyl-N-hydroxy-1H-pyrrolo[3,2-c]pyridine-6-carboxamide;
    • 3-(2-Chloro-4-fluoro-phenoxymethyl)-1-ethyl-N-hydroxy-1H-pyrrolo[3,2-c]pyridine-6-carboxamide;
    • 3-(3-Chloro-5-fluoro-2-hydroxybenzyl)-1-ethyl-N-hydroxy-1H-pyrrolo[3,2-c]pyridine-6-carboxamide;
    • 1-Ethyl-3-(4-fluoro-phenoxymethyl)-N-hydroxy-1H-pyrrolo[3,2-c]pyridine-6-carboxamide;
    • 1-Ethyl-3-(5-fluoro-2-hydroxybenzyl)-N-hydroxy-1H-pyrrolo[3,2-c]pyridine-6-carboxamide;
    • 1-Ethyl-N-hydroxy-3-(2,3,4-trifluoro-2-phenoxymethyl)-1H-pyrrolo[3,2-c]pyridine-6-carboxamide;
    • 1-Ethyl-N-hydroxy-3-(3,4,5-trifluoro-2-hydroxybenzyl)-1H-pyrrolo[3,2-c]pyridine-6-carboxamide;
    • 3-(2-Chloro-phenoxymethyl)-1 ethyl-N-hydroxy-1H-pyrrolo[3,2-c]pyridine-carboxamide;
    • 3-(5-Chloro-2-hydroxy-benzyl)-1-ethyl-N-hydroxy-1H-pyrrolo[3,2-c]pyridine-6-carboxamide and pharmaceutically acceptable salts thereof.
  • Additionally, compounds that modulate or inhibit HIV Integrase enzyme activity are desirable and are a preferred embodiment of the present invention. The activity of a HIV Integrase agent as an HIV Integrase inhibitor may be measured by any of the methods available to those skilled in the art, including in vivo and in vitro assays.
  • Pharmacology and Utility
  • Several different assay formats are available to measure integrase-mediated integration of viral DNA into target (or host) DNA and thus, identify compounds that modulate (e.g., inhibit) integrase activity. In general, for example, ligand-binding assays may be used to determine interaction with an enzyme of interest. When binding is of interest, a labeled enzyme may be used, wherein the label is a fluorescer, radioisotope, or the like, which registers a quantifiable change upon binding to the enzyme. Alternatively, the skilled artisan may employ an antibody for binding to the enzyme, wherein the antibody is labeled allowing for amplification of the signal. Thus, binding may be determined through direct measurement of ligand binding to an enzyme. In addition, binding may be determined by competitive displacement of a ligand bound to an enzyme, wherein the ligand is labeled with a detectable label. When inhibitory activity is of interest, an intact organism or cell may be studied, and the change in an organismic or cellular function in response to the binding of the Inhibitory compound may be measured. Alternatively, cellular response can be determined microscopically by monitoring viral induced syncytium-formation (HIV-1 syncytium-formation assays), for example. Thus, there are various in vitro and in vivo assays useful for measuring HIV integrase inhibitory activity. See, e.g., Lewin, S. R. et al., Journal of Virology 73(7): 6099-6103 (July 1999); Hansen, M. S. et al., Nature Biotechnology 17(6): 578-582 (June 1999); and Butler, S. L. et al., Nature Medicine 7(5): 631-34 (May 2001).
  • Exemplary specific assay formats used to measure integrase-mediated integration include, but are not limited to, ELISA, DELFIA® (PerkinElmer Life Sciences Inc. (Boston, Mass.)) and ORIGEN® (IGEN International, Inc. (Gaithersburg, Md.)) technologies. In addition, gel-based integration (detecting integration by measuring product formation with SDS-PAGE) and scintillation proximity assay (SPA) disintegration assays that use a single unit of double stranded-DNA (ds-DNA) may be used to monitor integrase activity.
  • In one embodiment of the invention, the preferred assay is an integrase strand-transfer SPA (stINTSPA) which uses SPA to specifically measure the strand-transfer mechanism of integrase in a homogenous assay scalable for miniaturization to allow high-throughput screening. The assay focuses on strand transfer and not on DNA binding and/or 3′ processing. This sensitive and reproducible assay is capable of distinguishing non-specific interactions from true enzymatic function by forming 3′ processed viral DNA/integrase complexes before the addition of target DNA. Such a formation creates a bias toward compound modulators (e.g., inhibitors) of strand-transfer and not toward compounds that inhibit integrase 3′ processing or prevent the association of integrase with viral DNA. This bias renders the assay more specific than known assays. In addition, the homogenous nature of the assay reduces the number of steps required to run the assay since the wash steps of a heterogenous assay are not required.
  • The integrase strand-transfer SPA format consists of 2 DNA components that model viral DNA and target DNA. The model viral DNA (also known as donor DNA) is biotinylated ds-DNA preprocessed at the 3′ end to provide a CA nucleotide base overhang at the 5′ end of the duplex. The target DNA (also known as host DNA) is a random nucleotide sequence of ds-DNA generally containing [3H]-thymidine nucleotides on both strands, preferably, at the 3′ ends, to enable detection of the integrase strand-transfer reaction that occurs on both strands of target ds-DNA.
  • Integrase (created recombinantly or synthetically and preferably, purified) is pre-complexed to the viral DNA bound to a surface, such as for example, streptavidin-coated SPA beads. Generally, the integrase is pre-complexed in a batch process by combining and incubating diluted viral DNA with integrase and then removing unbound integrase. The preferred molar ratio of viral DNA:integrase is about 1:about 5. The integrase/viral DNA incubation is optional, however, the incubation does provide for an increased specificity index with an integrase/viral DNA incubation time of about 15 to about 30 minutes at room temperature or at about 37° C. The preferred incubation is at about room temperature for about 15 minutes.
  • The reaction is initiated by adding target DNA, in the absence or presence of a potential integrase modulator compound, to the integrase/viral DNA beads (for example) and allowed to run for about 20 to about 50 minutes (depending on the type of assay container employed), at about room temperature or about 37° C., preferably, at about 37° C. The assay is terminated by adding stop buffer to the integrase reaction mixture. Components of the stop buffer, added sequentially or at one time, function to terminate enzymatic activity, dissociate integrase/DNA complexes, separate non-integrated DNA strands (denaturation agent), and, optionally, float the SPA beads to the surface of the reaction mixture to be closer in range to the detectors of, for example, a plate-based scintillation counter, to measure the level of integrated viral DNA which is quantified as light emitted (radiolabeled signal) from the SPA beads. The inclusion of an additional component in the stop buffer, such as for example CsCl or functionally equivalent compound, is optionally, and preferably, used with a plate-based scintillation counter, for example, with detectors positioned above the assay wells, such as for example a TopCount® counter (PerkinElmer Life Sciences Inc. (Boston, Mass.)). CsCl would not be employed when PMT readings are taken from the bottom of the plate, such as for example when a MicroBeta® counter (PerkinElmer Life Sciences Inc. (Boston, Mass.)) is used.
  • The specificity of the reaction can be determined from the ratio of the signal generated from the target DNA reaction with the viral DNA/integrase compared to the signal generated from the di-deoxy viral DNA/integrase. High concentrations (e.g., ≧50 nM) of target DNA may increase the d/dd DNA ratio along with an increased concentration of integrase in the integrase/viral DNA sample.
  • The results can be used to evaluate the integrase modulatory, such as for example inhibitory, activity of test compounds. For example, the skilled artisan may employ a high-throughput screening method to test combinatorial compound libraries or synthetic compounds. The percent inhibition of the compound may be calculated using an equation such as for example (1−((CPM sample−CPM min)/(CPM max−CPM min)))*100. The min value is the assay signal in the presence of a known modulator, such as for example an inhibitor, at a concentration about 100-fold higher than the IC50 for that compound. The min signal approximates the true background for the assay. The max value is the assay signal obtained for the integrase-mediated activity in the absence of compound. In addition, the IC50 values of synthetic and purified combinatorial compounds may be determined whereby compounds are prepared at about 10 or 100-fold higher concentrations than desired for testing in assays, followed by dilution of the compounds to generate an 8-point titration curve with ½-log dilution intervals, for example. The compound sample is then transferred to an assay well, for example. Further dilutions, such as for example, a 10-fold dilution, are optional. The percentage inhibition for an inhibitory compound, for example, may then be determined as above with values applied to a nonlinear regression, sigmoidal dose response equation (variable slope) using GraphPad Prism curve fitting software (GraphPad Software, Inc., San Diego, Calif.) or functionally equivalent software.
  • The stINTSPA assay conditions are preferably optimized for ratios of integrase, viral DNA and target DNA to generate a large and specific assay signal. A specific assay signal is defined as a signal distinguishing true strand-transfer catalytic events from complex formation of integrase and DNA that does not yield product. In other integrase assays, a large non-specific component (background) often contributes to the total assay signal unless the buffer conditions are rigorously optimized and counter-tested using a modified viral DNA oligonucleotide. The non-specific background is due to formation of integrase/viral DNA/target DNA complexes that are highly stable independent of a productive strand-transfer mechanism.
  • The preferred stINTSPA distinguishes complex formation from productive strand-transfer reactions by using a modified viral DNA oligonucleotide containing a di-deoxy nucleoside at the 3′ end as a control. This modified control DNA can be incorporated into integrase/viral DNA/target DNA complexes, but cannot serve as a substrate for strand-transfer. Thus, a distinct window between productive and non-productive strand-transfer reactions can be observed. Further, reactions with di-deoxy viral DNA beads give an assay signal closely matched to the true background of the assay using the preferred optimization conditions of the assay. The true background of the assay is defined as a reaction with all assay components (viral DNA and [3H]-target DNA) in the absence of integrase.
  • Assay buffers used in the integrase assay generally contain at least one reducing agent, such as for example 2-mercaptoethanol or DTT, wherein DTT as a fresh powder is preferred; at least one divalent cation, such as for example Mg++, Mn++, or Zn++, preferably, Mg++; at least one emulsifier/dispersing agent, such as for example octoxynol (also known as IGEPAL-CA or NP40) or CHAPS; NaCl or functionally equivalent compound; DMSO or functionally equivalent compound; and at least one buffer, such as for example MOPS. Key buffer characteristics are the absence of PEG; inclusion of a high concentration of a detergent, such as for example about 1 to about 5 mM CHAPS and/or about 0.02 to about 0.15% IGEPAL-CA or functionally equivalent compound(s) at least capable of reducing non-specific sticking to the SPA beads and assay wells and, possibly, enhancing the specificity index; inclusion of a high concentration of DMSO (about 1 to about 12%); and inclusion of modest levels of NaCl (≦50 mM) and MgCl2 (about 3 to about 10 mM) or functionally equivalent compounds capable of reducing the dd-DNA background. The assay buffers may optionally contain a preservative, such as for example NaN3, to reduce fungal and bacterial contaminants during storage.
  • The stop buffer preferably contains EDTA or functionally equivalent compound capable of terminating enzymatic activity, a denaturation agent comprising, for example, NaOH or guanidine hydrochloride, and, optionally, CsCl or functionally equivalent compound capable of assisting in floating the SPA beads to the top of the assay container for scintillation detection at the top of the reservoir and, possibly, minimizing compound interference. An example of an integrase strand-transfer SPA is set forth in Example 64.
  • Alternatively, the level of activity of the modulatory compounds may be determined in an antiviral assay, such as for example an assay that quantitatively measures the production of viral antigens (e.g., HIV-1 p24) or the activities of viral enzymes (e.g., HIV-1 reverse transcriptase) as indicators of virus replication, or that measures viral replication by monitoring the expression of an exogenous reporter gene introduced into the viral genome (HIV-1 reporter virus assays) (Chen, B. K. et al., J. Virol. 68(2): 654-460 (1994); Terwilliger, E. F. et al., PNAS 66:3857-3861 (1989)). A preferred method of measuring antiviral activity of a potential modulator compound employs an HIV-1 cell protection assay, wherein virus replication is measured indirectly by monitoring viral induced host-cell cytopathic effects using, for example, dye reduction methods as set forth in Example 65.
  • Preferred HIV integrase agents of the invention include those having an EC50 value of at least 10−5 M (or at least 10 μM) when measured with an HIV cell protection assay. Especially preferred anti-integrase agents are those having an EC50 value of at least 1 μM when measured with an HIV cell protection assay. Even more preferred are those agents having an EC50 value of at least 0.1 μM when measured with an HIV cell protection assay.
  • Administration and Pharmaceutical Compositions
  • The HIV Integrase agents of the invention may be formulated into pharmaceutical compositions as described below in any pharmaceutical form recognizable to the skilled artisan as being suitable. Pharmaceutical compositions of the invention comprise a therapeutically effective amount of at least one compound of Formula I and an inert, pharmaceutically acceptable carrier or diluent.
  • A “therapeutically effective amount” is intended to mean that amount of a compound that, when administered to a mammal in need of such treatment, is sufficient to effect treatment, as defined herein. Thus, e.g., a therapeutically effective amount of a compound of the Formula I, salt, active metabolite or prodrug thereof, is a quantity sufficient to modulate or inhibit the activity of HIV Integrase such that a disease condition that is mediated by activity is reduced or alleviated.
  • It will be appreciated that the actual dosages of the agents of this invention will vary according to the particular agent being used, the particular composition formulated, the mode of administration, and the particular site, host, and disease being treated. Optimal dosages for a given set of conditions may be ascertained by those skilled in the art using conventional dosage-determination tests in view of the experimental data for a given compound. For oral administration, an exemplary daily dose generally employed will be from about 0.001 to about 1000 mg/kg of body weight, with courses of treatment repeated at appropriate intervals. Administration of prodrugs may be dosed at weight levels that are chemically equivalent to the weight levels of the fully active compounds.
  • To treat or prevent diseases or conditions mediated by HIV, a pharmaceutical composition of the invention is administered in a suitable formulation prepared by combining a therapeutically effective amount (i.e., an HIV Integrase modulating, regulating, or inhibiting amount effective to achieve therapeutic efficacy) of at least one HIV Integrase agent of the invention (as an active ingredient) with one or more pharmaceutically suitable carriers, which may be selected, for example, from diluents, excipients and auxiliaries that facilitate processing of the active compounds into the final pharmaceutical preparations.
  • Additionally, the present invention is directed to a pharmaceutical composition comprising a therapeutically effective amount of at least one HIV Integrase agent in combination with one or more additional active ingredients, such as, for example, a second HIV Integrase agent, an HIV/AIDS antiviral agent, an anti-infective agent, and/or an immunomodulator.
  • The pharmaceutical carriers employed may be either solid or liquid. Exemplary solid carriers are lactose, sucrose, talc, gelatin, agar, pectin, acacia, magnesium stearate, stearic acid and the like. Exemplary liquid carriers are syrup, peanut oil, olive oil, water and the like. Similarly, the inventive compositions may include time-delay or time-release material known in the art, such as glyceryl monostearate or glyceryl distearate alone or with a wax, ethylcellulose, hydroxypropylmethylcellulose, methylmethacrylate or the like. Further additives or excipients may be added to achieve the desired formulation properties. For example, a bioavailability enhancer, such as Labrasol, Gelucire or the like, or formulator, such as CMC (carboxy-methylcellulose), PG (propyleneglycol), or PEG (polyethyleneglycol), may be added. Gelucire®, a semi-solid vehicle that protects active ingredients from light, moisture and oxidation, may be added, e.g., when preparing a capsule formulation.
  • If a solid carrier is used, the preparation can be tableted, placed in a hard gelatin capsule in powder or pellet form, or formed into a troche or lozenge. The amount of solid carrier may vary, but generally will be from about 25 mg to about 1 g. If a liquid carrier is used, the preparation may be in the form of syrup, emulsion, soft gelatin capsule, sterile injectable solution or suspension in an ampoule or vial or non-aqueous liquid suspension. If a semisolid carrier is used, the preparation may be in the form of hard and soft gelatin capsule formulations. The inventive compositions are prepared in unit-dosage form appropriate for the mode of administration, e.g., parenteral or oral administration.
  • To obtain a stable water-soluble dose form, a pharmaceutically acceptable salt of an inventive agent may be dissolved in an aqueous solution of an organic or inorganic acid, such as 0.3 M solution of succinic acid or citric acid. If a soluble salt form is not available, the agent may be dissolved in a suitable cosolvent or combinations of cosolvents. Examples of suitable cosolvents include alcohol, propylene glycol, polyethylene glycol 300, polysorbate 80, glycerin and the like in concentrations ranging from 0-60% of the total volume. In an exemplary embodiment, a compound of Formula I is dissolved in DMSO and diluted with water. The composition may also be in the form of a solution of a salt form of the active ingredient in an appropriate aqueous vehicle such as water or isotonic saline or dextrose solution.
  • Proper formulation is dependent upon the route of administration chosen. For injection, the agents of the invention may be formulated into aqueous solutions, preferably in physiologically compatible buffers such as Hanks solution, Ringer's solution, or physiological saline buffer. For transmucosal administration, penetrants appropriate to the barrier to be permeated are used in the formulation. Such penetrants are generally known in the art.
  • For oral administration, the compounds can be formulated readily by combining the active compounds with pharmaceutically acceptable carriers known in the art. Such carriers enable the compounds of the invention to be formulated as tablets, pills, dragees, capsules, liquids, gels, syrups, slurries, suspensions and the like, for oral ingestion by a patient to be treated. Pharmaceutical preparations for oral use can be obtained using a solid excipient in admixture with the active ingredient (agent), optionally grinding the resulting mixture, and processing the mixture of granules after adding suitable auxiliaries, if desired, to obtain tablets or dragee cores. Suitable excipients include: fillers such as sugars, including lactose, sucrose, mannitol, or sorbitol; and cellulose preparations, for example, maize starch, wheat starch, rice starch, potato starch, gelatin, gum, methyl cellulose, hydroxypropylmethyl-cellulose, sodium carboxymethylcellulose, or polyvinylpyrrolidone (PVP). If desired, disintegrating agents may be added, such as crosslinked polyvinyl pyrrolidone, agar, or alginic acid or a salt thereof such as sodium alginate.
  • Dragee cores are provided with suitable coatings. For this purpose, concentrated sugar solutions may be used, which may optionally contain gum arabic, polyvinyl pyrrolidone, Carbopol gel, polyethylene glycol, and/or titanium dioxide, lacquer solutions, and suitable organic solvents or solvent mixtures. Dyestuffs or pigments may be added to the tablets or dragee coatings for identification or to characterize different combinations of active agents.
  • Pharmaceutical preparations which can be used orally include push-fit capsules made of gelatin, as well as soft, sealed capsules made of gelatin and a plasticizer, such as glycerol or sorbitol. The push-fit capsules can contain the active ingredients in admixture with fillers such as lactose, binders such as starches, and/or lubricants such as talc or magnesium stearate, and, optionally, stabilizers. In soft capsules, the active agents may be dissolved or suspended in suitable liquids, such as fatty oils, liquid paraffin, or liquid polyethylene glycols. In addition, stabilizers may be added. All formulations for oral administration should be in dosages suitable for such administration. For buccal administration, the compositions may take the form of tablets or lozenges formulated in conventional manner.
  • For administration intranasally or by inhalation, the compounds for use according to the present invention may be conveniently delivered in the form of an aerosol spray presentation from pressurized packs or a nebuliser, with the use of a suitable propellant, e.g., dichlorodifluoromethane, trichlorofluoromethane, dichlorotetrafluoroethane, carbon dioxide or other suitable gas. In the case of a pressurized aerosol the dosage unit may be determined by providing a valve to deliver a metered amount. Capsules and cartridges of gelatin for use in an inhaler or insulator and the like may be formulated containing a powder mix of the compound and a suitable powder base such as lactose or starch.
  • The compounds may be formulated for parenteral administration by injection, e.g., by bolus injection or continuous infusion. Formulations for injection may be presented in unit-dosage form, e.g., in ampoules or in multi-dose containers, with an added preservative. The compositions may take such forms as suspensions, solutions or emulsions in oily or aqueous vehicles, and may contain formulatory agents such as suspending, stabilizing and/or dispersing agents.
  • Pharmaceutical formulations for parenteral administration include aqueous solutions of the active compounds in water-soluble form. Additionally, suspensions of the active agents may be prepared as appropriate oily injection suspensions. Suitable lipophilic solvents or vehicles include fatty oils such as sesame oil, or synthetic fatty acid esters, such as ethyl oleate or triglycerides, or liposomes. Aqueous injection suspensions may contain substances which increase the viscosity of the suspension, such as sodium carboxymethyl cellulose, sorbitol, or dextran. Optionally, the suspension may also contain suitable stabilizers or agents which increase the solubility of the compounds to allow for the preparation of highly concentrated solutions.
  • Alternatively, the active ingredient may be in powder form for constitution with a suitable vehicle, e.g., sterile pyrogen-free water, before use.
  • In addition to the formulations described above, the compounds may also be formulated as a depot preparation. Such long-acting formulations may be administered by implantation (for example, subcutaneously or intramuscularly) or by intramuscular injection. Thus, for example, the compounds may be formulated with suitable polymeric or hydrophobic materials (for example, as an emulsion in an acceptable oil) or ion-exchange resins, or as sparingly soluble derivatives, for example, as a sparingly soluble salt.
  • A pharmaceutical carrier for hydrophobic compounds is a cosolvent system comprising benzyl alcohol, a nonpolar surfactant, a water-miscible organic polymer, and an aqueous phase. The cosolvent system may be a VPD co-solvent system. VPD is a solution of 3% w/v benzyl alcohol, 8% w/v of the nonpolar surfactant polysorbate 80, and 65% w/v polyethylene glycol 300, made up to volume in absolute ethanol. The VPD co-solvent system (VPD: 5 W) contains VPD diluted 1:1 with a 5% dextrose in water solution. This co-solvent system dissolves hydrophobic compounds well, and itself produces low toxicity upon systemic administration. The proportions of a co-solvent system may be suitably varied without destroying its solubility and toxicity characteristics. Furthermore, the identity of the co-solvent components may be varied: for example, other low-toxicity nonpolar surfactants may be used instead of polysorbate 80; the fraction size of polyethylene glycol may be varied; other biocompatible polymers may replace polyethylene glycol, e.g. polyvinyl pyrrolidone; and other sugars or polysaccharides may be substituted for dextrose.
  • Alternatively, other delivery systems for hydrophobic pharmaceutical compounds may be employed. Liposomes and emulsions are known examples of delivery vehicles or carriers for hydrophobic drugs. Certain organic solvents such as dimethylsulfoxide also may be employed, although usually at the cost of greater toxicity due to the toxic nature of DMSO. Additionally, the compounds may be delivered using a sustained-release system, such as semipermeable matrices of solid hydrophobic polymers containing the therapeutic agent. Various sustained-release materials have been established and are known by those skilled in the art. Sustained-release capsules may, depending on their chemical nature, release the compounds for a few weeks up to over 100 days. Depending on the chemical nature and the biological stability of the therapeutic reagent, additional strategies for protein stabilization may be employed.
  • The pharmaceutical compositions also may comprise suitable solid- or gel-phase carriers or excipients. These carriers and excipients may provide marked improvement in the bioavailability of poorly-soluble drugs. Examples of such carriers or excipients include calcium carbonate, calcium phosphate, sugars, starches, cellulose derivatives, gelatin, and polymers such as polyethylene glycols. Furthermore, additives or excipients such as Gelucire®, Capryol®, Labrafil®, Labrasol®, Lauroglycol®, Plurol®, Peceol® Transcutol® and the like may be used. Further, the pharmaceutical composition may be incorporated into a skin patch for delivery of the drug directly onto the skin.
  • Some of the compounds of the invention may be provided as salts with pharmaceutically compatible counter ions. Pharmaceutically compatible salts may be formed with many acids, including hydrochloric, sulfuric, acetic, lactic, tartaric, malic, succinic, etc. Salts tend to be more soluble in aqueous or other protonic solvents than are the corresponding free-base forms.
  • Methods of Use
  • The present invention is further directed to methods of modulating or inhibiting an enzyme activity of HIV Integrase, for example in mammals, by contacting the HIV Integrase enzyme with an effective amount of one or more HIV Integrase agent(s) or a composition comprising a HIV Integrase agent as described above. Additionally, the present invention is directed to methods of treating HIV mediated diseases or conditions by administering a therapeutically effective amount of one or more HIV Integrase agent(s) or a composition comprising a HIV Integrase agent to a mammal in need of such treatment.
  • The terms “treat”, “treating”, and “treatment” refer to any treatment of a HIV Integrase mediated disease or condition in a mammal, particularly a human, and include: (I) preventing the disease or condition from occurring in a subject which may be predisposed to the condition, such that the treatment constitutes prophylactic treatment for the pathologic condition; (ii) modulating or inhibiting the disease or condition, i.e., arresting its development; (iii) relieving the disease or condition, i.e., causing regression of the disease or condition; or (iv) relieving and/or alleviating the disease or condition or the symptoms resulting from the disease or condition, e.g., relieving an inflammatory response without addressing the underlying disease or condition.
  • Diseases or conditions mediated by HIV include, but are not limited to, AIDS and ARC.
  • Synthesis of HIV Integrase Agents
  • The inventive agents may be prepared using the reaction routes and synthesis schemes as described below, employing the techniques available in the art using starting materials that are readily available. The preparation of preferred compounds of the present invention is described in detail in the following examples, but the artisan will recognize that the chemical reactions described may be readily adapted to prepare a number of other HIV Integrase agents of the invention. For example, the synthesis of non-exemplified compounds according to the invention may be performed by modifications apparent to those skilled in the art, e.g., by appropriately protecting interfering groups, by changing to other suitable reagents known in the art, or by making routine modifications of reaction conditions. Alternatively, other reactions disclosed herein or known in the art will be recognized as having adaptability for preparing other compounds of the invention.
  • Reagents useful for synthesizing compounds may be obtained or prepared according to techniques known in the art. For example, the preparation of free amines from common salt forms and stock reagent solutions can be useful for small-scale reactions. See also Abdel-Magid et al., “Reductive Amination of Aldehydes and Ketones with Sodium Triacetoxyborohydride,” J. Org. Chem. 61: 3849 (1996).
  • Methanolic solutions of the free bases can be prepared from hydrochloride, dihydrochloride, hydrobromide, or other salts when the free base is soluble in methanol. In this procedure, once the sodium methoxide is added, care should be taken to prevent exposure to air, since amine free bases, particularly primary amines, absorb carbon dioxide from the air to form salts. A 10-mL quantity of a 0.1M solution of a free base in methanol may be prepared as follows. Weigh 1.0 mmol of a monohydrochloride salt into a tared Erienmeyer flask containing a stirring bar, and add 7 mL of methanol. To the stirred slurry, add 229 mL (1.0 mmol, 1 equiv.) of sodium methoxide in methanol (25 wt %, 4.37 M), stopper the flask, and stir the mixture vigorously for 2 hours. The slurry will sometimes change in appearance as a finer, milky precipitate of sodium chloride is formed. Filter the slurry through a 15 mL medium fritted glass funnel, wash the filter case with 1-2 mL methanol, transfer the filtrate to a 20-mL vial, and dilute to 10 mL with methanol. The theoretical yield of sodium chloride is nearly 59 mg, but the recovery is usually not quantitative, owing to a slight solubility in methanol. For a dihydrochloride salt, a second equivalent of sodium methoxide is required (458 mL).
  • A 0.5 M solution of sodium borohydride in ethanol may be prepared as follows. Sodium borohydride (520 mg, 13.8 mmol) is stirred in pure (non-denatured) anhydrous ethanol (25 mL) for ˜2-3 minutes. The suspension is filtered through a medium fritted glass funnel to remove a small amount of undissolved solid (typically about 5% of the total mass of borohydride, or 25 mg). The filtrate should appear as a colorless solution that evolves only a little hydrogen. This solution should be used immediately, as it decomposes significantly over a period of a few hours, resulting in the formation of a gelatinous precipitate. Sodium borohydride is hygroscopic, so avoid exposure to air by making the solution at once after weighing the solid. Sodium borohydride has a solubility of about 4% in ethanol at room temperature. This corresponds to a little over 0.8 M. However, sometimes a small percentage of the solid remains undissolved regardless of the concentration being prepared, even after stirring for ≧5 minutes.
  • The following abbreviations employed throughout the application have the following meaning unless otherwise indicated: THF: tetrahydrofuran; DMF: N,N-dimethylformamide; TLC: thin-layer-chromatography; HATU: O-(azabenzotriazole-1-yl)-1,1,3,3-tetramethyl uronium hexafluorophosphate; EDC: N-(3-dimethylaminopropyl)N′-ethylcarbodiimide. Additional abbreviations employed throughout the application are either known to those skilled in the art or are explained in the Examples below.
  • EXAMPLES
  • The present invention will be further illustrated in the following, non-limiting examples.
  • In the examples described below, unless otherwise indicated, all temperatures in the following description are in degrees Celsius and all parts and percentages are by weight, unless indicated otherwise.
  • Various starting materials and other reagents were purchased from commercial suppliers, such as Aldrich Chemical Company or Lancaster Synthesis Ltd., and used without further purification, unless otherwise indicated. Tetrahydrofuran (THF) and N,N-dimethylformamide (DMF) were purchased from Aldrich in SureSeal® bottles and used as received. All solvents were purified by using standard methods in the art, unless otherwise indicated.
  • The reactions set forth below were performed under a positive pressure of nitrogen, argon or with a drying tube, at ambient temperature (unless otherwise stated), in anhydrous solvents, and the reaction flasks are fitted with rubber septa for the introduction of substrates and reagents via syringe. Glassware was oven-dried and/or heat-dried. Analytical thin-layer chromatography was performed on glass-backed silica gel 60° F. 254 plates (Analtech (0.25 mm)) and eluted with the appropriate solvent ratios (v/v). The reactions were assayed by TLC and terminated as judged by the consumption of starting material.
  • The TLC plates were visualized by UV absorption or with a p-anisaldehyde spray reagent or a phosphomolybdic acid reagent (Aldrich Chemical, 20 wt % in ethanol) which was activated with heat. Work-ups were typically done by doubling the reaction volume with the reaction solvent or extraction solvent and then washing with the indicated aqueous solutions using 25% by volume of the extraction volume (unless otherwise indicated). Product solutions were dried over anhydrous Na2SO4 prior to filtration, and evaporation of the solvents was under reduced pressure on a rotary evaporator and noted as solvents removed in vacuo. Flash column chromatography [Still et al., A. J. Org. Chem. 43:2923 (1978)] was conducted using Baker-grade flash silica gel (47-61 mm) and a silica gel: crude material ratio of about 20:1 to 50:1, unless otherwise stated. Hydrogenolysis was done at the pressure indicated or at ambient pressure.
  • 1H-NMR spectra were recorded on a Bruker instrument operating at 300 MHz, 500 MHz, and 13C-NMR spectra was recorded operating at 75 MHz. NMR spectra are obtained as CDCl3 solutions (reported in ppm), using chloroform as the reference standard (7.25 ppm and 77.00 ppm) or CD3OD (3.4 and 4.8 ppm and 49.3 ppm), or an internal tetramethylsilane standard (0.00 ppm) when appropriate. Other NMR solvents were used as needed. When peak multiplicities are reported, the following abbreviations are used: s=singlet, d=doublet, t=triplet, m=multiplet, br=broadened, dd=doublet of doublets, dt=doublet of triplets. Coupling constants, when given, are reported in Hertz.
  • Infrared spectra were recorded on a Perkin-Elmer FT-IR Spectrometer as neat oils, as KBr pellets, or as CDCl3 solutions, and when reported are in wave numbers (cm−1). The mass spectra were obtained using LC/MS or APCI. All melting points are uncorrected.
  • All final products had greater than 85% purity (by HPLC at wavelengths of 220 nm and 254 nm).
  • General Procedures
  • Figure US20080221154A1-20080911-C00015
  • The compounds of the present invention can be prepared directly from compound 1-1 (preferably a methyl or ethyl ester) and a substituted or unsubstituted hydroxyl amine in the presence of a base, such as, for example, sodium hydroxide or sodium alkoxide in methanol or ethanol (Hauser, C. R. et al., Org. Synth. Coll. Vol. 2, p. 67, John Wiley, New York (1943)). Alternatively, the compound 1-1 can be saponified to the free acid 1-2 using lithium hydroxide or sodium hydroxide in methanol/water mixtures and heating the mixture to 100° C. in a SmithCreator® microwave for 1 to 5 min. Compound 1-2 can be coupled with a substituted or unsubstituted hydroxylamine using a coupling reagent. Typical coupling reagents and conditions can be used, such as, for example, O-azabenzotriazole-1-yl)-1,1,3,3-tetramethyl uronium hexafluorophosphate (HATU), N-3-dimethylaminopropyl)-N′-ethylcarbodiimide (EDC) in DMF at ambient temperature, or many others that are familiar to those skilled in the art. Other suitable methods are described, for example, in Jerry March, Advanced Organic Chemistry, 5th edition, John Whiley & Sons, p. 508-511 (2001). The use of the preferred conditions described in this Scheme would allow for parallel preparation or combinatorial libraries of such hydroxamates 13.
  • Preparation of Intermediates and Starting Materials
  • Figure US20080221154A1-20080911-C00016
  • The precursors 1-4 (where X═N, Y═C, Z=C, R5═H, and preferably where R=an alkyl group and R8=an alkyl or aryl group unsubstituted or substituted with an alkyl group) (Compound 2-7) can be prepared from an arylsulfonyl or alkylsulfonyl protected pyrrole compound 2-2 formed from pyrrole compound 2-1 and an arylsulfonylchloride or an alkylsulfonylchloride in the presence of a base, such as, for example, triethylamine, using methods described, for example, in T. W. Greene, Protective Groups in Organic Chemistry, 3rd edition, John Wiley & Sons, pp. 615-617 (1999). Reductive amination with a suitable substituted glycine ester compound 2-3 and a reducing agent, such as, for example, NaCNBH3 or NaBH(OAc)3 (Abdet-Magid, A. F. et al., Tetrahedron Lett., 31, 5595-5598 (1990)) can provide the amine compound 2-4. Additional methods for reductive amination exist and are reviewed in C. F. Lane, Synthesis, p. 135 (1975). Titanium tetrachloride mediated cyclization (Dekhane, M. et al., Tetrahedron, 49, pp. 8139-8146 (1993): and Singh, S. K., Heterocycles, 44, pp. 379-391 (1997)) in a solvent, such as, for example, benzene or toluene, at the boiling temperature of the solvent can provide the arylsulfonyl or alkylsulfonyl protected precursor compound 2-5, which can be converted to the desired unprotected indole compound 2-6 using sodium alkoxide in alcohol (M. Dekhane, P. Potier, R. H. Dodd, Tetrahedron, 49, 8139-8146 (1993)). Alkylation of compound 2-6 with an alkylhalide in a polar solvent such as DMF or DMSO using sodium hydride as base (Eberle, M. K., J. Org. Chem. 41, pp. 633-636 (1976); Sundberg, R. J. et al., J. Org. Chem. 38, pp. 3324-3330 (1973)) can provide the desired precursor compound 2-7.
  • Figure US20080221154A1-20080911-C00017
  • Scheme 3 depicts an alternative method for obtaining intermediate compound 2-5 adapted from the literature (preferably where R=an alkyl group and R8=an alkyl or aryl group unsubstituted or substituted with an alkyl group) (Rousseau, J. F. et al., J. Org. Chem., 63, pp. 2731-2737 (1998) and citations therein) starting from the substituted pyrrole compound 3-1. The pyrrole nitrogen can be protected as a sulfonamide using the same methods described in scheme 2. Addition of the anion of a N-Cbz glycine ester can provide the intermediate compound 3-4. Removal of the Cbz protecting group can be achieved using palladium catalyzed hydrogenation or other methods, such as those described in T. W. Greene, Protective Groups in Organic Chemistry, 3rd edition, John Wiley & Sons, pp. 531-537 (1999). Pictet-Spengler condensation followed by palladium catalyzed dehydrogenation in xylene can afford the intermediate compound 2-5.
  • Figure US20080221154A1-20080911-C00018
  • Scheme 4 (preferably where R=an alkyl group) depicts a route for synthesizing 3-substituted pyrrolo[2,3-c]pyridine compounds 4-5 from the unsubstituted precursor compound 4-1 (preferably where R=an alkyl group). Reaction of compound 4-1 with Eschenmoser' salt (Kozikowski, A. P. et al., Heterocycles, 14, pp. 55-58 (1980)) can give the dimethylaminomethyl derivative compound 4-2. Alternatively, this step can be performed using classic Mannich reaction conditions (review: Brewster, J. H. et al., Org. Reactions, 7, p. 99 (1953)). Upon treatment of compound 4-2 with sodium acetate and acetic anhydride in acetonitrile (Cocker, J. N. et al., J. Org. Chem., 28, pp. 589-590 (1963)) the corresponding acetate compound 4-3 can be obtained which on hydrolysis with a base, such as, for example, potassium carbonate in methanol, can provide the precursor compound 4-4. Alkylation of the alcohol compound 4-4 can be achieved using, for example, an alkylhalide in a presence of a base, such as, sodium hydride in DMF as solvent.
  • Figure US20080221154A1-20080911-C00019
  • Scheme 5 depicts a method for obtaining imidazo[4,5-c]pyridine precursor compounds 1-1 where X═N, Y═C, Z=N (compounds 5-5 and 5-6). The histidine precursor compound 5-1 is commercially available or can be prepared according published methods (Kelley, J. L. et al., J. Med. Chem. 20, pp. 721-723 (1977); Trout, G., J. Med. Chem., 15, pp. 1259-1261 (1972)). Pictet-Spengler reaction of compound 5-1 (Guzman, F. et al., J. Med. Chem., 27, pp. 564-570 (1984); Cain, M. et al., Heterocycles, 19, pp. 1003-1007 (1982)) can give the 1,2,3,4-tetrahydro-imidazo[4,5-c]pyridine-3-carboxylate compound 5-2, which can be converted to the methyl ester via the corresponding acyl chloride or similar methods of ester formation known to those skilled in the art. Dehydration to the unsaturated intermediate compound 5-3 can be achieved with selenium dioxide (Lee, J. G. et al, Tetrahedron Lett, 33, pp. 6363-6366 (1992)), or a catalyst such as palladium, platinum in a solvent, such as, for example, xylene, at the boiling temperature of the solvent (Soerens, D. et al., J. Org. Chem., 44, pp. 535-545 (1979)). Alkylation of compound 5-4 with an alkylhalide in the presence of a base, such as, sodium hydride, similar to the methods described in scheme 2, can provide the desired precursors as a mixture of regioisomer compounds 5-5 and 5-6 that can be separated by column chromatography or other methods known to those skilled in the art.
  • Figure US20080221154A1-20080911-C00020
    Figure US20080221154A1-20080911-C00021
  • Scheme 6 depicts a method for formation of N-hydroxy lactame compounds 6-5 and 6-6 (where R1═H or CO2Et; R2═H; R5═H). Radical bromination of a methyl substituted indole 6-1 can be achieved by various reagents (March, Jerry, Advanced Organic Chemistry, 5th edition, John Whiley & Sons, pp. 911-914 (2001)), the most common being N-bromosuccinimide (NBS). It will be apparent to those skilled in the art that successful execution of this reaction can depend highly on the substitution pattern of the precursor 6-1. Reaction of an alkylhalide compound 6-2 (Doisy, X. et al., Bioorg. Med. Chem., 7, pp. 921-932 (1999)) with benzyl hydroxylamine in a presence of a base, such as, triethylamine, can provide compound 6-3. Treatment with sodium ethoxide in ethanol can result in lactame formation and cleavage of the phenylsulfonyl protecting group. Alkylation of compound 6-4 with an alkylhalide in the presence of a base, such as, sodium hydride in DMF, similar to the methods described in scheme 2, can provide N-benzyloxy lactame compound 6-5. The benzyl protecting group can be removed using various methods known in the art (See, e.g, Greene, T. W., Protective Groups in Organic Chemistry, 3rd edition, John Wiley & Sons, pp. 76-86 (1999)), such as, for example, palladium catalysed hydrogenation. As is obvious to those skilled in the art, different protecting groups, such as, for example, tert-butyl, 4-methoxybenzyl, tetrahydropyranyl, methoxymethyl, tert-butyl-dimethylsilyl, instead of the benzyl group, might be used to form the final product, compound 6-6.
  • Figure US20080221154A1-20080911-C00022
  • Scheme 7 sets forth a method for producing pyrrolo[3,2-c]pyridine derivatives 1-1 where X═C, Y═C, Z=N, and preferably R=an alkyl group (compound 7-3) via a substituted pyrrole compound 7-1 and 2-azabutadiene compound 7-3 (Kantlehner, W. et al., Liebigs Ann. Chem., pp. 344-357 (1980)) under proton catalysis, following the procedures described in Biere, H. et al., Liebigs Ann. Chem., pp. 491-494 (1987).
  • Figure US20080221154A1-20080911-C00023
  • Scheme 8 depicts treating compound 7-4 where R3═H and preferably R=an alkyl group (compound 8-1) in a fashion similar to the methods outlined in Scheme 4. Reaction of compound 8-1 with Eschenmoser' salt (Kozikowski, A. P. et al., Heterocycles, 14, pp. 55-58 (1980)) can give the dimethylaminomethyl derivative compound 8-2. Alternatively, this step can be performed using classic Mannich reaction conditions (review. Brewster, J. H. et al., Org. Reactions, 7, p. 99 (1953)). Upon treatment of compound 8-2 with sodium acetate and acetic anhydride in acetonitrile (Cocker, J. N. et al., J. Org. Chem., 28, pp. 589-570 (1963)) the corresponding acetate 84 can be obtained which on hydrolysis with a base, such as, for example, potassium carbonate in methanol can provide the precursor compound 8-4. Treatment of the alcohol with a phenol compound 8-5 (preferably where R7, and R8=a halogen, nitro, CO2R, CN, CF3, or COR group) under standard Mitsunobu conditions (review: Hughes, D., Org. Prep. Proced. Int., 28, pp. 127-164 (1996)) using triphenylphosphine, diisopropylazodicarboxylate and a base, such as, for example, triethylamine, can provide a phenolic ether compound 8-6, and the benzylic isomer compound 8-7 formed via C-alkylation of the phenol compound 8-5.
  • Figure US20080221154A1-20080911-C00024
  • Scheme 9 depicts a general method for formation of compounds of general structure 1-1 described by Gilchrist, T. L. et al, J. C. S. Chem. Comm., pp. 627-628 (1979); Henn, L., J. Chem. Soc. Perkin Trans., 1, pp. 2189-2196 (1984); and Shafiee, A. et al., J. Heterocyclic Chem., 23, pp. 1171-1173 (1986). It is expected that reaction of a substituted heteroaromatic aldehyde or ketone compound 9-1 with ethyl or methyl azidoacetate compound 9-2 in the presence of a base, such as, for example, sodium hydride, will provide azidocinnamate compound 9-4, which on thermolysis in boiling toluene or xylene is expected to provide the desired product 9-4 (where preferably R=an alkyl group).
  • Figure US20080221154A1-20080911-C00025
    Figure US20080221154A1-20080911-C00026
  • Alternatively, it is expected that compounds of general structure 1-1 (Compounds 10-6, 9-4, and 10-9 in this Scheme) (preferably where R=an alkyl group) can be obtained by the method depicted in Scheme 10 as described by Molina, P. et al., Tetrahedron, 47, pp. 6737-6747 (1991). It is expected that reaction of a substituted heteroaromatic aldehyde or ketone compound 10-1 with ethyl or methyl azidoacetate compound 10-2 in the presence of a base, such as, for example, sodium hydride can provide azidocinnamate compound 10-3. It is also expected that Staudinger reaction using triphenylphosphine can generate iminiphosphorane compound 10-4 that can undergo aza-Wittig type reactions with isocyanates (Molina, P. et al., Synthesis, pp. 45-48 (1987); Krutosikova, A. et al., Monatsh. Chem., 123, pp. 807-815 (1992)) to form compound 10-6 via intermediate 10-5. Alternatively, it is expected that the iminophosphorane compound 10-4 can be reacted with aldehydes and ketenes to provide compound 9-4 or 10-9 through intermediates 10-7 or 10-8, receptively.
  • Figure US20080221154A1-20080911-C00027
  • Another general method expected to provide the desired precursor compounds 1-1(Compound 9-4 in this Scheme) is depicted in Scheme 11. This method relies on the condensation of a dicarbonyl compound 11-1 with ethyl glycinate compound 11-2 (Mataka, S. et al., J. Heterocyclic. Chem., 18, pp. 1073-1075 (1981); Kreher, R. P. et al., Chemiker-Zeitung, 9, pp. 275-277 (1984)) to provide a mixture of regioisomers compounds 9-4 and 11-3. The compounds 9-4 and 11-3 can be separated by column chromatography or any other methods known to persons skilled in the art.
  • Other compounds of Formula I may be prepared in manners analogous to the general procedures described above or the detailed procedures described in the following examples:
  • Example 1 1-(2,4-Difluorobenzyl)-N-hydroxy-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-c]pyridine-5-carboxamide
  • Figure US20080221154A1-20080911-C00028
  • (a) Ethyl 1-(2,4-difluorobenzyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-c]pyridine-6-carboxylate. To a stirred solution of ethyl 1H-pyrrolo[2,3-c]pyridine-5-carboxylate [prepared according to M. Dekhane, P. Potier, R. H. Dodd, Tetrahedron, 1993, 49, 8139-8146] (0.50 g, 2.63 mmol) in DMF (10 mL) under a nitrogen atmosphere was added sodium hydride (0.087 g, 80% in mineral oil, 2.89 mmol) and 2,4-difluorobenzyl bromide (0.60 g, 2.89 mmol). The resulting mixture was stirred for 16 hours at ambient temperature. It was quenched with water (30 mL), and extracted with ethyl acetate (3×30 mL). The combined organic extracts were washed with water (2×30 mL), dried over sodium sulfate, concentrated in vacuo and purified by flash chromatography. Elution with hexane:ethyl acetate (1:1) provided the title compound as a light yellow solid (0.40 g, 48% yield). 1H NMR (CD3OD) δ; 8.86 (s, 1H), 8.47 (s, 1H), 7.71 (d, 1H, J=3.2 Hz), 7.31 (dd, 1H, J=6.3 Hz), 6.94-7.05 (m, 2H), 6.79 (d, 1H, J=3.2 Hz), 5.63 (s, 2H), 4.46 (q, 2H, J=7.3 Hz), 1.45 (t, 3H, J=7.3 Hz). LCMS (API-ES, M+H+): 317.0.
  • (b) 1-(2,4-Difluorobenzyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-c]pyridine-5-carboxylic acid. To ethyl 1-(2,4-difluorobenzyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-c]pyridine-5-carboxylate (0.30 g, 1.58 mmol) in methanol (3 mL) was added sodium hydroxide (0.076 g, 3.16 mmol) in water (0.5 mL). The reaction was heated in a SmithCreator™ (microwave reactor from Personal Chemistry) to 100° C. for five minutes. The reaction solution was poured into water (30 mL) and the pH was adjusted to 2-3 by addition of citric acid. The precipitate that formed was collected by filtration and dried in vacuo to provide the title compound as a white powder (0.15 g, 55% yield). 1H NMR (DMSO-d6): δ; 8.97 (s, 1H), 8.35 (s, 1H), 7.82 (d, 1H, J=3.2 Hz), 7.28-7.38 (m, 2H), 7.09 (t, 1H, J=8.4 Hz), 6.76 (d, 1H, J=3.2 Hz), 5.67 (s, 2H). LCMS (API-ES, M+H+): 289.1.
  • (c) 1-(2,4-Difluorobenzyl)-N-hydroxy-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-c]pyridine-5-carboxamide. To 1-(2,4-difluorobenzyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-c]pyridine-5-carboxylic acid (0.15 g, 0.52 mmol) in DM F (10 mL) were added O-(7-azabenzotriazol-1-yl)-1,1,3,3-tetramethyluronium hexafluorophosphate (HATU; 0.20 g, 0.52 mmol), triethylamine (0.15 ml, 1.05 mmol), and hydroxylamine hydrochloride (0.036 g, 0.52 mmol). The resulting mixture was stirred for 16 hours at ambient temperature. It was quenched with water (30 mL), extracted with ethyl acetate (3×30 mL). The combined organic extracts were washed with water (2×30 mL), dried over sodium sulfate, concentrated in vacuo and purified by preparative HPLC to provide the title compound as a white powder (0.075 g, 48% yield). 1H NMR (DMSO-d6) δ; 11.14 (s, 1H), 8.92 (s, 1H), 8.85 (s, 1H), 8.21 (s, 1H), 7.78 (s, 1H), 7.26-7.38 (m, 2H), 7.08 (t, 1H, J=8.3 Hz), 6.71 (d, 1H, J=3.0 Hz), 5.64 (s, 2H). LCMS (API-ES, M+H+): 304.1. HRMS calcd for C15H12F2N3O2 (M+H) 304.0898, found 304.0886. HPLC: 98% purity.
  • Example 2 1-(2,4-Difluorobenzyl)-N-hydroxy-N-methyl-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-c]pyridine-5-carboxamide
  • Figure US20080221154A1-20080911-C00029
  • The title compound was prepared by coupling of 1-(2,4-difluorobenzyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-c]pyridine-5-carboxylic acid and N-methyl hydroxylamine hydrochloride in a manner similar to step (c) of example 1. 1H NMR (DMSO-d6) δ; 11.10 (br, 1H), 8.92 (s, 1H), 8.04 (s, 1H), 7.82 (s, 1H), 7.26-7.38 (m, 2H), 7.07-7.08 (m, 1H), 6.72 (s, 1H), 5.64 (s, 2H), 3.33 (s, 3H). LCMS (API-ES, M+H+): 318.0. HRMS calcd for C18H14F2N3O2(M+H) 318.1054, found 318.1037. HPLC: 100% purity.
  • Example 3 1-(4-Fluorobenzyl)-N-hydroxy-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-c]pyridine-5-carboxamide
  • Figure US20080221154A1-20080911-C00030
  • (a) Ethyl 1-(4-fluorobenzyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-c]pyridine-5-carboxylate. The title compound was prepared by alkylation of ethyl 1H-pyrrolo[2,3-c]pyridine-carboxylate with 4-fluorobenzyl bromide in a manner similar to step (a) of example 1. 1H NMR (CD3OD) δ; 8.91 (s, 1H), 8.62 (s, 1H), 7.90 (d, 1H, J=3.0 Hz), 7.42 (m, 2H), 7.20 (m, 2H), 6.90 (d, 1H, J=3.0 Hz), 5.75 (s, 2H), 4.60 (q, 2H, J=7.0 Hz), 1.60 (t, 3H, J=7.0 Hz). LCMS (API-ES, M+H+): 299.1.
  • (b) 1-(4-Fluorobenzyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-c]pyridine-5-carboxylic acid. The title compound was prepared by hydrolysis of ethyl 1-(4-fluoro-benzyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-c]pyridine-5-carboxylate in a manner similar to step (b) of example 1. 1H NMR (DMSO-d6): δ; 8.97 (s, 1H), 8.35 (s, 1H), 7.90 (d, 1H, J=3.0 Hz), 7.35 (m, 2H), 7.15 (m, 2H), 6.76 (d, 1H, J=3.0 Hz), 5.67 (s, 2H). LCMS (API-ES, M+H+): 271.1.
  • (c) 1-(4-Fluorobenzyl)-N-hydroxy-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-]pyridine-5-carboxamide. The title compound was prepared by coupling of 1-(4-fluorobenzyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-c]pyridine-5-carboxylic acid with hydroxylamine hydrochloride in a manner similar to step (c) of example 1. 1H NMR (DMSO-d8) δ; 11.12 (s, 1H), 8.90 (s, 1H), 8.83 (s, 1H), 8.21 (s, 1H), 7.85 (d, 1H, J=3 Hz), 7.36 (d, 2H, J=8.3 Hz), 7.17 (d, 2H, J=8.4 Hz), 6.71 (d, 1H, J=3.0 Hz), 5.59 (s, 2H). LCMS (API-ES, M+H+): 286.1. HRMS calcd for C15H13FN3O2 (M+H) 286.0992, found 286.0978. Anal. (CISH12FN3O2) C, H, N. HPLC: 96.6% purity.
  • Example 4 1-(4-Fluorobenzyl)-N-hydroxy-N-methyl-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-c]pyridine-5-carboxamide
  • Figure US20080221154A1-20080911-C00031
  • The title compound was prepared by coupling of 1-(4-fluorobenzyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-c]pyridine-5-carboxylic acid with N-methyl hydroxylamine hydrochloride in a manner similar to step (c) of example 1. 1H NMR (DMSO-d6) δ; 12.00 (br s, 1H), 8.91 (s, 1H), 8.03 (s, 1H), 7.91 (d, 1H, J=2.8 Hz), 7.38 (dd, 2H, J=5.7 Hz, J=8.5 Hz), 7.12 (d, 2H, J=8.5 Hz), 6.71 (d, 1H, J=3.0 Hz), 5.59 (s, 2H), 3.33 (s, 3H). LCMS (API-ES, M+H+): 301.1. HRMS calcd for C16H15FN3O2(M+H) 300.1148, found 300.1138. HPLC: 100% purity
  • Example 5 N-Benzyl-1-(4-fluorobenzyl)-N-hydroxy-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-c]pyridine-5-carboxamide
  • Figure US20080221154A1-20080911-C00032
  • The title compound was prepared by coupling of 1-(4-fluorobenzyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-c]pyridine-5-carboxylic acid with N-benzyl hydroxylamine hydrochloride in a manner similar to step (c) of example 1. 1H NMR (DMSO-d6) δ; 8.92 (s, 1H), 8.11 (s, 1H), 7.91 (d, 1H, J=2.8 Hz), 7.26-7.38 (m, 7H), 7.16 (d, 2H, J=8.5 Hz), 6.72 (d, 1H, J=2.8 Hz), 5.58 (s, 2H), 4.97 (s, 2H). LCMS (API-ES, M+H+): 376.1, HRMS calcd for C22H19FN3O2 (M+H) 376.1461, found 376.1448. Anal. (C22H18FN3O2) C, H, N. HPLC: 100% purity.
  • Example 6 1-(3-Chloro-2,6-difluorobenzyl)-N-hydroxy-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-c]pyridine-5-carboxamide
  • Figure US20080221154A1-20080911-C00033
  • (a) Ethyl 1-(3-chloro-2,6-difluorobenzyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-c]pyridine-5-carboxylate. The title compound was prepared by alkylation of ethyl 1H-pyrrolo[2,3-c]pyridine-5-carboxylate with 3-chloro-2,6-difluoro-benzyl bromide in a manner similar to step (a) of example 1. 1H NMR (CD3OD) δ; 8.96 (s, 1H), 8.47 (s, 1H), 7.71 (d, 1H, J=3.0 Hz), 7.55 (m, 1H), 7.05 (m, 1H), 6.75 (d, 1H, J=3.0 Hz), 5.72 (s, 2H), 4.52 (q, 2H, J=7.3 Hz), 1.45 (t, 3H, J=7.3 Hz). LCMS (API-ES, M+H+): 351.0.
  • (b) 1-(3-Chloro-2,6-difluorobenzyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-c]pyridine-5-carboxylic acid. The title compound was prepared by hydrolysis of ethyl 1-(3-Chloro-2,6-difluoro-benzyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-c]pyridine-5-carboxylate in a manner similar to step (b) of example 1. 1H NMR (DMSO-d6): δ; 8.95 (s, 1H), 8.34 (s, 1H), 7.75 (d, 1H, J=3.2 Hz), 7.65-7.73 (m, 1H), 7.24-7.31 (m, 1H), 6.75 (d, 1H, J=3.2 Hz), 5.75 (s, 2H). LCMS (API-ES, M+H+): 323.0.
  • (c) 1-(3-Chloro-2,6-difluorobenzyl)-N-hydroxy-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-c]pyridine-5-carboxamide. The title compound was prepared by coupling of 1-(1-(3-Chloro-2,6-difluoro-benzyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-c]pyridine-5-carboxylic acid and hydroxylamine hydrochloride in a manner similar to step (c) of example 1. 1H NMR (DMSO-d6) δ; 11.17 (s, 1H), 8.89 (s, 1H), 8.81 (s, 1H), 8.18 (s, 1H), 7.69-7.70 (m, 2H), 7.25 (m, 1H), 6.68 (s, 1H), 5.70 (s, 2H). LCMS (APCI, M+H+): 338.0. HRMS (M+H) calcd for C15H11ClF2N3O2 (M+H) 338.0508, found 338.0511. HPLC: 95% purity
  • Example 7 1-(5-Chloro-thiophen-2-ylmethyl)-N-hydroxy-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-c]pyridine-5-carboxamide
  • Figure US20080221154A1-20080911-C00034
  • (a) Ethyl 1-(5-chloro-thiophen-2-ylmethyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-c]pyridine-5-carboxylate. The title compound was prepared by alkylation of ethyl 1H-pyrrolo[2,3-c]pyridine-5-carboxylate with 2-chloro-5-(chloromethyl)-thiophene in a manner similar to step (a) of example 1. 1H NMR (CD3OD) δ; 8.89 (s, 1H), 8.48 (s, 1H), 7.72 (d, 1H, J=3.2 Hz), 6.99 (d, 1H, J=3.8 Hz)), 6.87 (d, 1H, J=4.8 Hz), 6.75 (d, 1H, J=3.2 Hz), 5.73 (s, 2H), 4.46 (q, 2H, J=7.2 Hz), 1.46 (t, 3H, J=7.2 Hz). LCMS (API-ES, M+H+): 321.0.
  • (b) 1-(5-Chloro-thiophen-2-ylmethyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-c]pyridine-5-carboxylic acid. The title compound was prepared by hydrolysis of ethyl 1-(5-chloro-thiophen-2-ylmethyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-c]pyridine-5-carboxylate in a manner similar to step (b) of example 1. 1H NMR (DMSO-d6): δ; 9.05 (s, 1H), 8.34 (s, 1H), 7.88 (d, 1H, J=3.0 Hz), 7.12 (d, 1H, J=3.8 Hz), 7.01 (d, 1H, J=4.0 Hz), 6.75 (d, 1H, J=3.2 Hz), 5.78 (s, 2H). LCMS (API-ES, M+H+): 293.0.
  • (c) 1-(5-Chloro-thiophen-2-ylmethyl)-N-hydroxy-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-c]pyridine-5-carboxamide. The title compound was prepared by coupling of 1-(1-(5-Chloro-thiophen-2-ylmethyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-c]pyridine-5-carboxylic acid with hydroxylamine hydrochloride in a manner similar to step (c) of example 1. 1H NMR (DMSO-d6) δ; 11.15 (s, 1H), 8.93 (s, 2H), 8.21 (s, 1H), 7.81 (d, 1H, J=2.1 Hz), 7.10 (d, 1H, J=3.6 Hz), 6.99 (d, 1H, J=2.8 Hz), 6.70 (d, 1H, J=3.0 Hz), 5.76 (s, 2H). LCMS (API-ES, M+H+): 308.0. HRMS calcd for C13H11N3O2SCl (M+H) 308.0261, found 308.0265. Anal. (C13H10ClN3O2S) C, H, N. HPLC: 100% purity.
  • Example 8 1-(3-Chloro-2-fluorobenzyl)-N-hydroxy-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-c]pyridine-5-carboxamide
  • Figure US20080221154A1-20080911-C00035
  • (a) Ethyl 1-(3-chloro-2-fluorobenzyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-]pyridine-5-carboxylate. The title compound was prepared by alkylation of ethyl 1H-pyrrolo[2,3-c]pyridine-5-carboxylate and 3-chloro-2-fluoro-benzyl bromide in a manner similar to step (a) of example 1. 1H NMR (CDCl3) δ; 9.05 (s, 1H), 8.50 (s, 1H), 7.55 (d, 1H, J=3.0 Hz), 7.40 (m, 1H), 7.00 (m, 2H), 6.80 (d, 1H, J=3.0 Hz), 5.55 (s, 2H), 4.50 (q, 2H, J=7.0 Hz), 1.50 (t, 3H, J=7.0 Hz). LCMS (API-ES, M+H+): 333.0.
  • (b) 1-(3-Chloro-2-fluorobenzyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-c]pyridine-5-carboxylic acid. The title compound was prepared by hydrolysis of ethyl 1-(3-chloro-2-fluoro-benzyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-c]pyridine-carboxylate in a manner similar to step (b) of example 1. 1H NMR (DMSO-d6): δ: 8.96 (s, 1H), 8.35 (s, 1H), 7.84 (d, 1H, J=3.0 Hz), 7.56 (t, 1H, J=7.4 Hz), 7.19 (t, 1H, J=7.9 Hz), 7.09 (t, 1H, J=7.3 Hz), 5.75 (s, 2H). LCMS (API-ES, M+H+): 305.0.
  • (c) 1-(3-Chloro-2-fluorobenzyl)-N-hydroxy-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-c]pyridine-carboxamide. The title compound was prepared by coupling of 1-(3-chloro-2-fluorobenzyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-c]pyridine-5-carboxylic acid with hydroxylamine hydrochloride in a manner similar to step (c) of example 1. 1H NMR (DMSO-d6) δ; 11.16 (s, 1H), 8.95 (s, 1H), 8.85 (s, 1H), 8.23 (s, 1H), 7.79 (d, 1H, J=2.8 Hz), 7.55 (t, 1H, J=7.5 Hz), 7.19 (t, 1H, J=7.5 Hz), 7.10 (t, 1H, J=7.5 Hz), 6.73 (d, 1H, J=3.0 Hz), 5.74 (s, 2H). LCMS (API-ES, M+H+): 320.0. HRMS calcd for C15H12ClFN3O2 (M+H) 320.0602, found 320.06045. HPLC: 100% purity.
  • Example 9 (1-(2,3-Dichlorobenzyl)-N-hydroxy-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-c]pyridine-5-carboxamide
  • Figure US20080221154A1-20080911-C00036
  • (a) Ethyl 1-(2,3-dichlorobenzyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-c]pyridine-5-carboxylate. The title compound was prepared by alkylation of ethyl 1H-pyrrolo[2,3-c]pyridine-5-carboxylate with 2,3-dichlorobenzyl chloride in a manner similar to step (a) of example 1. 1H NMR (DMSO-d6) δ; 9.15 (s, 1H), 8.63 (s, 1H), 8.04 (d, 1H, J=3.0 Hz), 7.85 (d, 1H, J=8.1 Hz), 7.52 (t, 1H, J=7.9 Hz), 7.04 (d, 1H, J=3.0 Hz), 6.91 (d, 1H, J=7.9 Hz), 6.01 (s, 2H), 4.56 (q, 2H, J=7.2 Hz), 1.57 (t, 3H, J=7.0 Hz). LCMS (API-ES, M+H+): 349.0, 351.0, 353.0 (10:6:1).
  • b) 1-(2,3-Dichlorobenzyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-]pyridine-5-carboxylic acid. The title compound was prepared by hydrolysis of 1-(2,3-dichloro-benzyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-c]pyridine-5-carboxylic acid ethyl ester in a manner similar to step (b) of example 1. 1H NMR (DMSO-d6): δ; 8.92 (s, 1H), 8.40 (s, 1H), 7.83 (d, 1H, J=3.0 Hz), 7.62 (d, 1H, J=7.4 Hz), 7.30 (t, 1H, J=7.8 Hz), 6.83 (d, 1H, J=3.0 Hz), 6.68 (d, 1H, J=7.9 Hz), 5.79 (s, 2H). LCMS (API-ES, M+H+): 320.9, 323.0, 325.0 (10:6:1).
  • (c) (1-(2,3-Dichlorobenzyl)-N-hydroxy-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-c]pyridine-5-carboxamide. The title compound was prepared by coupling of 1-(2,3-dichloro-benzyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-c]pyridine-5-carboxylic acid with hydroxylamine hydrochloride in a manner similar to step (c) of example 1. 1H NMR (DMSO-d6) δ; 11.15 (s, 1H), 8.91 (s, 1H), 8.78 (s, 1H), 8.24 (s, 1H), 7.76 (d, 1H, J=3.2 Hz), 7.60 (d, 1H, J=8.1 Hz), 7.28 (t, 1H, J=8.1 Hz), 6.76 (d, 1H, J=3.0 Hz), 6.67 (d, 1H, J=7.7 Hz), 5.75 (s, 2H). LCMS (API-ES, M+H+): 336.0, 338.0, 340.0 (10:6:1). HRMS calcd C15H12Cl2N3O2(M+H) 336.0303, found 336.0300. HPLC: 100% purity
  • Example 10 1-(5-Ethoxy-[1,2,3]thiadiazol-4-ylmethyl)-N-hydroxy-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-c]pyridine-5-carboxamide
  • Figure US20080221154A1-20080911-C00037
  • (a) Ethyl 1-(5-chloro-[1,2,3]thiadiazol-4-ylmethyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-c]pyridine-5-carboxylate. The title compound was prepared by alkylation of ethyl 1H-pyrrolo[2,3-c]pyridine-5-carboxylate and 5-chloro-4-chloromethyl-[1,2,3]thiadiazole in a manner similar to step (a) of example 1. 1H NMR (DMSO-d8). δ; 8.99 (s, 1H), 8.36 (s, 1H), 7.85 (d, 1H, J=3.0 Hz), 6.75 (d, 1H, J=3.0 Hz), 6.04 (s, 2H), 4.32 (q, 2H, J=7.0 Hz), 1.32 (t, 3H, J=7.0 Hz). LCMS (API-ES, M+H+): 323.0.
  • (b) 1-(5-Ethoxy-[1,2,3]thiadiazol-4-ylmethyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-c]pyridine-5-carboxylic acid. The title compound was prepared by hydrolysis of ethyl 1-(5-chloro-[1,2,3]thiadiazol-4-ylmethyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-c]pyridine-5-carboxylate in a manner similar to step (b) of example 1 using sodium hydroxide as base and anhydrous ethanol as solvent 1H NMR (DMSO-d6): δ: 9.01 (s, 1H), 8.35 (s, 1H), 7.85 (d, 1H, J=3.0 Hz), 6.75 (d, 1H, J=3.0 Hz), 5.86 (s, 2H), 4.36 (q, 2H, J=6.8 Hz), 1.42 (t, 3H, J=6.8 Hz). LCMS (API-ES, M+H+): 305.0.
  • (c) 1-(5-Ethoxy-[1,2,3]thiadiazol-4-ylmethyl)-N-hydroxy-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-c]pyridine-5-carboxamide. The title compound was prepared by coupling of 1-(5-ethoxy-[1,2,3]thiadiazol-4-ylmethyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-c]pyridine-5-carboxylic acid and hydroxylamine hydrochloride in a manner similar to step (c) of example 1. 1H NMR (DMSO-d6) δ; 11.15 (s, 1H), 8.88 (s, 2H), 8.19 (s, 1H), 7.73 (d, 1H, J=3.0 Hz), 6.66 (d, 1H, J=3.0 Hz), 5.81 (s, 2H), 4.32 (q, 2H, J=6.8 Hz), 1.39 (t, 3H, J=6.9 Hz). LCMS (APCI, M+H+): 320.1. HRMS calcd for C13H14NSO3S (M+H) 320.0817, found 320.0823. HPLC: 100% purity.
  • Example 11 1-(2,4-Difluorobenzyl)-3-ethoxymethyl-N-hydroxy-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-c]pyridine-5-carboxamide
  • Figure US20080221154A1-20080911-C00038
  • (a) Ethyl 1-(2,4-difluorobenzyl)-3-dimethylaminomethyl-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-c]pyridine-5-carboxylate. A solution of ethyl 1-(2,4-difluoro-benzyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-c]pyridine-5-carboxylate (1.5 g, 4.74 mmol) and N,N-dimethylmethylene-ammonium iodide (0.97 g, 5.22 mmol) in acetonitrile (50 mL) was refluxed for 16 h under nitrogen. The reaction mixture was cooled, quenched with saturated aqueous sodium bicarbonate solution (30 mL), and extracted with ethyl acetate (3×30 mL). The combined organic extracts were dried over sodium sulfate, concentrated and purified by flash chromatograph with methanol/dichloromethane (1:10) to provide the title compound (1.5 g, yield 85%). 1H NMR (DMSO-d6) δ; 8.92 (s, 1H), 8.36 (s, 1H), 7.67 (s, 1H), 7.25-7.36 (m, 2H), 6.04-7.07 (m, 1H), 5.60 (s, 2H), 4.30 (q, 2H, J=7.0 Hz), 3.57 (s, 2H), 2.13 (s, 6H), 1.31 (t, 3H, J=7.0 Hz). LCMS (APCI, M+H+): 374.2.
  • (b) Ethyl 3-acetoxymethyl-1-(2,4-difluorobenzyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-c]pyridine-5-carboxylate. A solution of ethyl 1-(2,4-difluoro-benzyl)-3-dimethylaminomethyl-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-c]pyridine-5-carboxylate (1.0 g, 2.68 mmol) in anhydrous acetic anhydride (20 mL) containing dry sodium acetate (0.44 g, 5.36 mmol) was refluxed for 4 h under nitrogen. The reaction mixture was cooled, saturated aqueous sodium bicarbonate solution (30 mL) was added and the solution was extracted with ethyl acetate (3×30 mL). The combined organic extracts dried over sodium sulfate, concentrated and dried in vacuo to provide the title compound as a solid (1.0 g, 96% yield). 1H NMR (CDCl3) 6; 8.85 (s, 1H), 8.53 (s, 1H), 7.44 (s, 1H), 7.07-7.09 (m, 1H), 6.08-6.87 (m, 2H), 5.40 (s, 2H), 5.28 (s, 2H), 4.49 (q, 2H, J=7.2 Hz), 2.03 (s, 3H), 1.43-1.48 (t, 3H, J=7.2 Hz). LCMS (APCI, M+H+): 389.1.
  • (c) Ethyl 1-(2,4-difluorobenzyl)-3-hydroxymethyl-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-c]pyridine-5-carboxylate. To ethyl 3-acetoxymethyl-1-(2,4-difluoro-benzyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-c]pyridine-5-carboxylate (1.0 g, 2.58 mmol) in ethanol (50 mL) and water (0.5 mL) was added potassium carbonate (0.21 g, 1.52 mmol). The mixture was stirred at ambient temperature for 3 hours, quenched with water (30 mL), extracted with ethyl acetate (3×30 mL). The combined organic extracts were dried over sodium sulfate, concentrated and dried in vacuo to provide the title compound (0.85 g, quant). 1H NMR (CD3OD) δ; 8.85 (s, 1H), 8.53 (s, 1H), 7.44 (s, 1H), 7.05-7.10 (m, 1H), 6.79-6.90 (m, 2H), 5.40 (s, 2H), 5.28 (s, 2H), 4.49-4.53 (q, 2H, J=7.0 Hz), 1.46 (t, 3H, J=7.0 Hz). LCMS (APCI, M+H+): 347.1.
  • (d) Ethyl 1-(2,4-difluorobenzyl)-3-ethoxymethyl-1H-pyrrolo[2,3]pyridine-5-carboxylate. A single neck 25 mL flask with magnetic stir bar was dried in vacuum with heat and then nitrogen gas was introduced into flask at ambient temperature. To ethyl 1-(2,4-difluorobenzyl)-3-hydroxymethyl-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-c]pyridine-5-carboxylic acid (0.28 g, 0.81 mmol) in anhydrous DMF (5 mL) was added sodium hydride (0.026 g, 80% in mineral oil, 0.87 mmol). The resulting mixture was stirred at ambient temperature for five minutes and iodoethane (0.07 mL, 1.36 g, 0.88 mmol) was added to the flask. The mixture was stirred 16 hours at ambient temperature, quenched with water (30 mL), and extracted with ethyl acetate (3×30 mL). The combined organic extracts were dried over sodium sulfate, concentrated and purified by flash chromatography. Elution with ethyl acetate provided the title product as a solid (0.15 g, 50% yield). 1H NMR (CD3OD) δ; 8.87 (s, 1H), 8.53 (s, 1H), 7.71 (s, 1H), 7.30-7.36 (m, 1H), 6.94-7.08 (m, 2H), 6.62 (s, 2H), 4.76 (s, 2H), 4.46 (q, 2H, J=7.1 Hz), 3.62 (q, 2H, J=7.0 Hz), 1.46 (t, 3H, J=7.1 Hz), 1.25 (t, 3H, J=7.0 Hz). LCMS (API-ES, M+H+): 375.0.
  • (e) 1-(2,4-Difluorobenzyl)-3-ethoxymethyl-N-hydroxy-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-q]pyridine-5-carboxamide. To ethyl 1-(2,4-difluoro-benzyl)-3-ethoxymethyl-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-c]pyridine-5-carboxylate (0.13 g, 0.35 mmol) in methanol (10 mL) were added hydroxylamine (2.0 mL, 50% in water, 33.3 mmol) and sodium hydroxide solution (1.0 mL, 1N aqueous solution, 1.0 mmol) at ambient temperature. The solution was stirred at ambient temperature for 5 hours. The solution was concentrated until the product precipitated out. It was collected by filtration, and successively washed with water (10 mL) and ethyl acetate/hexane 1:1 (10 mL), and recrystallized from ethanol to give pure title compound (0.050 g, 39% yield). 1H NMR (DMSO-d6) δ; 11.18 (s, 1H), 8.94 (s, 1H), 8.86 (s, 1H), 8.23 (s, 1H), 7.75 (s, 1H), 7.33-7.39 (m, 2H), 7.10 (m, 1H), 5.62 (s, 2H), 4.64 (s, 2H), 3.51 (q, 2H, J=6.9 Hz), 1.17 (t, 3H, J=7.0 Hz). LCMS (API-ES, M+H+): 362.0. HRMS calcd for C18H18F2N3O3 (M+H) 362.1316, found 362. 1309. Anal. (C18H17F2N3O3) C, H, N. HPLC: 98.0% purity
  • Example 12 1-(2,4-Difluorobenzyl)-N-hydroxymethyl-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-c]pyridine-5-carboxamide
  • Figure US20080221154A1-20080911-C00039
  • (a) Methyl 1-(2,4-difluorobenzyl)-4-methyl-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-c]pyridine-5-carboxylate. The title compound was prepared by alkylation of methyl 4-methyl-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-c]pyridine-5-carboxylate [prepared according to X. Doisy et al., Bioorg. Med. Chem. 1999, 7, 921-932) with 2,4-difluoro-benzyl bromide in a manner similar to step (a) of example 1. 1H NMR (CDCl3) δ: 8.75 (s, 1H), 7.75 (d, 1H, J=3.0 Hz), 7.20 (m, 2H), 7.10 (m, 1H), 6.80 (d, 1H, J=3.0 Hz), 5.60 (s, 2H), 3.80 (s, 3H), 2.65 (s, 3H). LCMS (API-ES, M+H+): 317.1.
  • (b) 1-(2,4-Difluorobenzyl)-N-hydroxy-4-methyl-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-c]pyridine-5-carboxamide. The title compound was prepared from 1-(2,4-difluoro-benzyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-c]pyridine-5-carboxylic acid methyl ester in a manner similar to step (e) of example 11 1H NMR (DMSO-d6) δ; 10.82 (s, 1H), 8.86 (broad s, 1H), 8.67 (s, 1H), 7.73 (d, 1H, J=3.0 Hz), 7.25-7.32 (m, 2H), 7.02-7.09 (m, 1H), 6.73 (d, 1H, J=3.0 Hz), 5.60 (s, 2H), 2.66 (s, 3H). LCMS (APCI, M+H+): 318.0. HRMS calcd for C16H14F2N3O2 (M+H) 318.1054, found 318.1044. HPLC: 95.1% purity.
  • Example 13 1-(2,4-Difluorobenzyl)-N-hydroxy-3-hydroxymethyl-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-c]pyridine-5-carboxamide
  • Figure US20080221154A1-20080911-C00040
  • The title compound was prepared from ethyl 1-(2,4-difluoro-benzyl)-3-hydroxymethyl-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-c]pyridine-5-carboxylate in a manner similar to step (e) of example 11. 1H NMR (CD3OD) δ; 8.79 (s, 1H), 8.43 (s, 1H), 7.62 (s, 1H), 7.24-7.32 (m, 1H), 7.01 (m, 1H), 7.92-6.98 (m, 1H), 5.58 (s, 2H), 4.84 (s, 2H). LCMS (API-ES, M+H+): 334.1. HRMS calcd for C16H14F2N3O3(M+H) 334. 1003, found 334.0998. Anal. (C18H14F2N3O3) C, H, N. HPLC: 100% purity.
  • Example 14 1-(2,4-Difluorobenzyl)-3-dimethylaminomethyl-N-hydroxy-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-c]pyridine-5-carboxamide
  • Figure US20080221154A1-20080911-C00041
  • The title compound was prepared from ethyl 1-(2,4-difluoro-benzyl)-3-dimethylaminomethyl-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-c]pyridine-5-carboxylate in a manner similar to step (e) of example 11. 1H NMR (CD3OD) δ; 8.81 (s, 1H), 8.41 (s, 1H), 7.72 (s, 1H), 7.33 (m, 1H), 7.03 (m, 2H), 5.60 (s, 2H), 4.06 (s, 2H), 2.52 (s, 6H). LCMS (API-ES, M+H+): 361.1 HRMS calcd for C18H19F2N4O3 (M+H) 361.1474, found 361.1483. HPLC: 100% purity.
  • Example 15 3-Benzyloxymethyl-1-(2,4-difluorobenzyl)-N-hydroxy-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-c]pyridine-carboxamide
  • Figure US20080221154A1-20080911-C00042
  • (a) Ethyl 3-benzyloxymethyl-1-(2,4-difluorobenzyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-]pyridine-5-carboxylate. The title compound was prepared by alkylation of ethyl 1-(2,4-difluoro-benzyl)-3-hydroxymethyl-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-c]pyridine-5-carboxylate and benzyl bromide in a manner similar to step (d) of example 11. 1H NMR (CD3OD) δ; 8.83 (s, 1H), 8.48 (s, 1H), 7.68 (s, 1H), 7.34 (m, 6H), 7.02 (m, 2H), 5.58 (s, 2H), 4.76 (s, 2H), 4.56 (s, 2H), 4.44 (q, 2H, J=7.0 Hz), 1.43 (t, 3H, J=7.0 Hz). LCMS (API-ES, M+H+): 437.1.
  • (b) 3-Benzyloxymethyl-1-(2,4-difluorobenzyl)-N-hydroxy-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-c]pyridine-1-carboxamide. The title compound was prepared from ethyl 3-benzyloxymethyl-1-(2,4-difluorobenzyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-c]pyridine-5-carboxylate in a manner similar to step (e) of example 11. 1H NMR (DMSO-d6) δ; 11.16 (s, 1H), 8.95 (s, 1H), 8.84 (s, 1H), 8.25 (s, 1H), 7.77 (s, 1H), 7.01 (m, 1H), 7.31 (m, 7H), 7.07 (m, 1H), 5.61 (s, 2H), 4.71 (s, 2H), 4.51 (s, 2H). LCMS (API-ES, M+H+): 424.1. HRMS calcd for C23H20F2N3O3 (M+H) 424.1473, found 424. 1472. Anal. (C23H19F2N3O3) C, H, N. HPLC: 100% purity.
  • Example 16 3-(2,4-Difluorobenzyl)-N-hydroxy-3H-imidazo[4,5-c]pyridine-6-carboxamide
  • Figure US20080221154A1-20080911-C00043
  • (a) (6S)-4,5,6,7-Tetrahydro-3H-imidazo[4,5-c]pyridine-6-carboxylic acid dihydrochloride. L-histidine (204.8 g, 1.32 mol) was added to water (1.2 L) and cooled on an ice/water bath. Concentrated hydrochloric acid (116.0 mL, 1.39 mol, 1.05 mol eqv.) was added slowly. Formaldehyde, 37 wt/wt % in water (112.5 g, 1.39 mol, 1.05 mol eqv.) was added in one portion. The reaction mixture was stirred for 30 min upon cooling on an ice/water bath, and then refluxed for 75 min. After cooling to room temperature, the solvent was removed under reduced pressure. The residue was suspended in isopropanol (2 L) and HCl (400 mL of a 4 M solution in dioxane) for 30 min. The white solid was filtered and washed with ether. After drying in a vacuum oven (40° C.), the title product was obtained. (313.0 g, 99% yield, 95% pure). 1H NMR (DMSO-d6): δ3.05-3.33 (m, 2H), 4.30 (s, 2H), 4.54 (m, 1H), 9.00 (s, 1H), 12.60 (br s, 3H). LC-MS: Rt=0.59 min, and M+1=168.1 m/z (M+1 of free base).
  • (b) Methyl (6S)-4,5,6,7-tetrahydro-3H-imidazo[4,5-c]pyridine-6-carboxylate dihydrochloride. Thionylchloride (200 mL, 2.74 mol, 3.0 mol eqv.) was added dropwise to methanol (3.5 L), which was cooled to 0-5° C. (6S)-4,5,6,7-tetrahydro-3H-imidazo[4,5-c]pyridine-6-carboxylic acid dihydrochloride (210.0 g, 0.87 mol) was added, and the suspension was allowed to warm up to room temperature, and refluxed for 3.5 h. After cooling to room temperature, the solvent was removed under reduced pressure. The white residue was suspended in ether (3 L). The solid was filtered and washed with ether. After drying in a vacuum oven (40° C.), the title compound was obtained (225.0 g, 100% yield, 95% pure). 1H NMR (DMSO-d6): δ12.65 (br s, 2H), 9.04 (s, 1H), 4.71 (m, 1H), 4.33 (t, J=16.2 Hz, 2H), 3.81 (s, 3H), 3.10-3.33 (m, 2H), LC-MS: Rf=0.61 min, and M+1=182.1 nm z (M+1 of free base).
  • (c) Methyl 3H-imidazo[4,5-]pyridine-6-carboxylate. Methyl (6S)-4,5,6,7-tetrahydro-3H-imidazo[4,5-c]pyridine-6-carboxylate dihydrochloride (156.5 g, 0.62 mol), triethylamine (445.0 g, 4.4 mol, 7.0 mol eqv.), selenium dioxide (158.2 g, 1.43 mol, 2.3 mol eqv.), and polyphosphatesilyl ether (PPSE) (15.0 g) were added to CCl4 (1.5 L). The mixture was refluxed for 6 h. After cooling to room temperature, the solvent was removed under reduced pressure. The residue was suspended in methanol (1.5 L), and triethylamine was added to adjust to pH 8. The brown solid was filtered and washed well with methanol. This brown solid (117.0 g) was recrystallized from hot DMF (2 L)/140° C. The solution was filtered hot to remove black side product of selenium salt. Upon cooling to room temperature, the desired product crystallized out as a yellow solid (51.3 g, 47% yield, 95% pure). 1H NMR (DMSO-d6): δ 13.20 (br s, 1H), 9.02 (s, 1H), 8.58 (s, 1H), 8.31 (s, 1H), 3.89 (s, 3H); LCMS: Rt=1.33 min, and M+1=178.1 m/
  • (d) Methyl 3-(2,4-difluorobenzyl)-3H-imidazo[4,5-c]pyridine-6-carboxylate and methyl 1-(2,4-difluorobenzyl)-1H-imidazo[4,5-c]pyridine-6-carboxylate. The title compounds were prepared by alkylation of methyl1H-imidazo[4,5-c]pyridine-6-carboxylate with 2,4-difluorobenzyl bromide in a manner similar to step (a) of example 1. The two regioisomers were separated by column chromatograph using ethyl acetate as eluent and characterized by Roesy 1H NMR.
  • Methyl 3-(2,4-difluorobenzyl)-3H-imidazo[4,5-c]pyridine-6-carboxylate: Rf: 0.29 (ethyl acetate); 1H NMR (CD3OD) δ; 9.02 (s, 1H), 8.70 (s, 1H), 8.34 (s, 1H), 7.53-7.59 (m, 1H), 7.30-7.33 (m, 1H), 7.09-7.12 (m, 1H), 5.71 (s, 2H), 3.87 (s, 3H). LCMS (API-ES, M+H+): 304.0.
  • Methyl 1-(2,4-difluorobenzyl)-1H-imidazo[4,5-c]pyridine-6-carboxylate: Rf: 0.18 (ethyl acetate); 1H NMR (CD3OD) δ; 9.03 (s, 1H), 8.68 (s, 1H), 8.40 (s, 1H), 7.45-7.51 (m, 1H), 7.29-7.31 (m, 1H), 7.09-7.11 (m, 1H), 5.69 (s, 2H), 3.88 (s, 3H). LCMS (API-ES, M+H+): 304.1.
  • (e) 3-(2,4-Difluorobenzyl)-N-hydroxy-3H-imidazo[4,5-c]pyridine-6-carboxamide. The title compound was prepared from methyl 3-(2,4-difluorobenzyl)-3H-imidazo[4,5-c]pyridine-6-carboxylate in a manner similar to step (e) of example 11. 1H NMR (DMSO-d6) δ; 11.27 (s, 1H), 9.00 (s, 1H), 8.88 (s, 1H), 8.66 (s, 1H), 8.19 (s, 1H), 7.58 (m, 1H), 7.31 (m, 1H), 7.11 (m, 1H), 5.70 (s, 2H). LCMS (API-ES, M+H+): 305.0. HRMS calcd for C14H11F2N4O2 (M+H) 305.0850, found 305. 0837. HPLC: 100% purity.
  • Example 17 1-(2,4-Difluorobenzyl)-N-hydroxy-1H-imidazo[4,5-c]pyridine-carboxamide
  • Figure US20080221154A1-20080911-C00044
  • The title compound was prepared from methyl 1-(2,4-difluoro-benzyl)-1H-imidazo[4,5-c]pyridine-Carboxylate in a manner similar to step (e) of example 11. 1H NMR (DMSO-d6) δ: 11.36 (s, 1H), 9.00 (s, 1H), 8.93 (s, 1H), 8.61 (s, 1H), 8.25 (s, 1H), 7.49 (m, 1H), 7.30 (m, 1H), 7.11 (m, 1H), 5.68 (s, 2H). LCMS (API-ES, M+H+): 305.0. HRMS calcd for C14H11F2N4O2. (M+H) 305.0850, found 305.0838. HPLC: 100% purity.
  • Example 18 1-(2,4-Difluorobenzyl)-3-ethoxymethyl-N-hydroxy-N-methyl-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-c]pyridine-5-carboxamide
  • Figure US20080221154A1-20080911-C00045
  • (a) 1-(2,4-Difluorobenzyl)-3-ethoxymethyl-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-c]pyridine-5-carboxylic acid. The title compound was prepared by hydrolysis of ethyl 1-(2,4-difluorobenzyl)-3-ethoxymethyl-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-c]pyridine-5-carboxylate in a manner similar to step (b) of example 1. 1H NMR (DMSO-d6). δ; 8.96 (s, 1H), 8.34 (s, 1H), 7.78 (s, 1H), 7.08-7.40 (m, 2H), 7.07 (m, 1H), 5.62 (s, 2H), 4.63 (s, 2H), 3.48 (q, 2H, J=7.0 Hz), 1.11 (t, 3H, J=7.0 Hz). LCMS (API-ES, M+H+): 347.0.
  • (b) 1-(2,4-Difluorobenzyl)-3-ethoxymethyl-N-hydroxy-N-methyl-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-c]pyridine-5-carboxamide. The title compound was prepared by coupling of 1-(2,4-difluorobenzyl)-3-ethoxymethyl-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-c]pyridine-5-carboxylic acid and N-methyl hydroxylamine hydrochloride in a manner similar to step (c) of example 1. 1H NMR (CD3OD) 6; 8.81 (s, 1H), 8.27 (s, 1H), 7.71 (s, 1H), 7.29-7.30 (m, 1H), 6.98-7.30 (m, 2H), 5.58 (s, 2H), 4.72 (s, 2H), 3.59 (q, 2H, J=7.0 Hz), 3.43 (s, 3H), 1.20 (t 3H, J=7.0 Hz). LCMS (APCI, M+H+): 376.1. HRMS calcd for C19H20F2N3O3 (M+H) 376.1473, found 376.1454. Anal. (C19H19F2N3O3×0.2H2O) C, H, N. HPLC: 100% purity.
  • Example 19 1-(2,4-Difluorobenzyl)-N-hydroxy-3-hydroxymethyl-N-methyl-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-c]pyridine-5-carboxamide
  • Figure US20080221154A1-20080911-C00046
  • (a) 1-(2,4-Difluorobenzyl)-3-hydroxymethyl-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-c]pyridine-5-carboxylic acid. The title compound was prepared by hydrolysis of ethyl 1-(2,4-difluoro-benzyl)-3-hydroxymethyl-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-c]pyridine-5-carboxylate in a manner similar to step (b) of example 1. 1H NMR (DMSO-d6). δ; 8.96 (s, 1H), 8.41 (s, 1H), 7.69 (s, 1H), 7.29-7.32 (m, 2H), 7.08 (m, 1H), 5.61 (s, 2H), 5.09 (s, 1H), 4.66 (s, 2H). LCMS (API-ES, M+H+): 319.1.
  • (b) 1-(2,4-Difluorobenzyl))N-hydroxy-3-hydroxymethyl-N-methyl-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-c]pyridine-5-carboxamide. The title compound was prepared by coupling of 1-(2,4-difluoro-benzyl)-3-hydroxymethyl-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-c]pyridine-5-carboxylic acid and N-methyl hydroxylamine hydrochloride in a manner similar to step (c) of example 1. 1H NMR (CD3OD) δ; 8.80 (s, 1H), 8.29 (s, 1H), 7.67 (s, 1H), 7.29-7.32 (m, 1H), 6.93-7.04 (m, 2H), 5.57 (s, 2H), 4.81 (s, 2H), 3.43 (s, 3H). LCMS (APCI, M+H+): 348.0. HRMS (M+H): 348.1175; cal: 348.1160 with C17H16F2N3O3. HPLC: 96.15% purity.
  • Example 20 1-(2,4-Difluorobenzyl)-3-dimethylaminomethyl-N-hydroxy-N-methyl-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-c]pyridine-5-carboxamide
  • Figure US20080221154A1-20080911-C00047
  • (a) 1-(2,4-Difluorobenzyl)-3-dimethylaminomethyl-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-c]pyridine-5-carboxylic acid. The title compound was prepared by hydrolysis of ethyl 1-(2,4-difluorobenzyl)-3-dimethylaminomethyl-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-c]pyridine-5-carboxylate in a manner similar to step (b) of example 1. 1H NMR (DMSO-d) δ; 8.91 (s, 1H), 8.43 (s, 1H), 7.74 (s, 1H), 7.29-7.37 (m, 2H), 7.04-7.10 (m, 1H), 5.62 (s, 2H), 3.70 (s, 2H), 2.22 (s, 6H). LCMS (API-ES, M+H+): 346.3.
  • (b) 1-(2,4-Difluorobenzyl)-3-dimethylaminomethyl-N-hydroxy-N-methyl-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-c]pyridine-5-carboxamide. The title compound was prepared by coupling of 1-(2,4-difluorobenzyl)-3-dimethylaminomethyl-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-c]pyridine-5-carboxylic acid and N-methyl hydroxylamine hydrochloride in a manner similar to step (c) of example 1. 1H NMR (DMSO-d6) δ; 9.44 (broad s, 1H), 8.96 (s, 1H), 8.26 (s, 1H), 7.93 (s, 1H), 7.44 (m, 1H), 7.28-7.35 (m, 1H), 7.10 (m, 1H), 5.66 (s, 2H), 4.47 (s, 2H), 3.32 (s, 3H), 2.72 (s, 6H). LCMS (APCI, M+H+): 375.0. HRMS calcd for C19H21F2N4O2. (M+H) 375.1633, found 375.1632. HPLC: 97.62% purity.
  • Example 21 1-(2,4-Difluorobenzyl)-N-methoxy-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-c]pyridine-5-carboxamide
  • Figure US20080221154A1-20080911-C00048
  • The title compound was prepared by coupling of 1-(2,4-difluorobenzyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-c]pyridine-5-carboxylic acid and O-methyl hydroxylamine hydrochloride in analogy to step (c) of example 1. 1H NMR (CD3OD) δ; 8.80 (s, 1H), 8.33 (s, 1H), 7.64 (d, 1H, J=3.0 Hz), 7.24-7.27 (m, 1H), 6.96-7.08 (m, 2H), 6.74 (d, 1H, J=3.0 Hz), 5.62 (s, 2H) 3.85 (s, 3H). LCMS (API-ES, M+H+): 318.0. HRMS calcd for C16H14F2N3O2. (M+H) 318.1054, found 318.1045. Anal. (C16H13F2N3O2) C, H, N. HPLC: 99.6% purity.
  • Example 22 1-(2,4-Difluorobenzyl)-3-ethoxymethyl-N-methoxy-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-c]pyridine-5-carboxamide
  • Figure US20080221154A1-20080911-C00049
  • The title compound was prepared by coupling of 1-(2,4-difluoro-benzyl)-3-ethoxymethyl-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-c]pyridine-5-carboxylic acid and O-methyl hydroxylamine hydrochloride in a manner similar to step (c) of example 1. 1H NMR (CD3OD) δ; 8.75 (s, 1H), 8.37 (s, 1H), 7.61 (s, 1H), 7.21-7.28 (m, 1H), 6.88-7.00 (m, 2H), 5.54 (s, 2H), 4.70 (s, 2H), 3.82 (s, 3H), 3.59 (q, 2H, J=7.0 Hz), 1.20 (t, 3H, J=7.0 Hz). LCMS (APCI, M+H+): 376.1. HRMS calcd for C19H20F2N3O3 (M+H) 376.1473, found 376.1485. HPLC: 99.24% purity.
  • Example 23 1-(2,4-Difluorobenzyl)-3-hydroxymethyl-N-methoxy-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-c]pyridine-5-carboxamide
  • Figure US20080221154A1-20080911-C00050
  • The title compound was prepared by coupling of 1-(2,4-difluoro-benzyl)-3-hydroxymethyl-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-c]pyridine-5-carboxylic acid and O-methyl hydroxylamine hydrochloride in a manner similar to step (c) of example 1. 1H NMR(CD3OD) δ; 8.76 (s, 1H), 8.41 (s, 1H), 7.58 (s, 1H), 7.23-7.29 (m, 1H), 6.88-7.00 (m, 2H), 5.54 (s, 2H), 4.80 (s, 2H), 3.82 (s, 3H). LCMS (APCI, M+H+): 348.0. HRMS calcd for C17H16F2N3O3 (M+H) 348.1160, found 348.1148. HPLC: 100% purity.
  • Example 24 1-(2,4-Difluorobenzyl)-3-methylaminomethyl-N-methoxy-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-c]pyridine-5-carboxamide
  • Figure US20080221154A1-20080911-C00051
  • The title compound was prepared by coupling of 1-(2,4-difluoro-benzyl)-3-dimethylaminomethyl-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-c]pyridine-5-carboxylic acid and O-methyl hydroxylamine hydrochloride in a manner similar to step (c) of example 1. 1H NMR (CD3OD) δ; 8.90 (s, 1H), 8.50 (s, 1H), 7.89 (s, 1H), 7.41 (m, 1H), 7.00-7.07 (m, 2H), 5.64 (s, 2H), 4.52 (s, 2H), 3.82 (s, 3H), 2.85 (s, 6H). LCMS (APCI, M+H+): 375.0. HRMS calcd for C19H21F2N4O2 (M+H) 375.1633, found 375.1644. HPLC: 100% purity.
  • Example 25 N-Benzyloxy-1-(2,4-difluorobenzyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-c]pyridine-5-carboxamide
  • Figure US20080221154A1-20080911-C00052
  • 1-[3-dimethylamino)propyl]-3-ethyl-carbodiimide hydrochloride (EDC, 126 mg, 0.67 mmol) and 1-hydroxybenzotriazole (HOBt, 56 mg, 0.56 mmol) was added to a the stirred solution of 1-(2,4-difluorobenzyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-c]pyridine-5-carboxylic acid (70 mg, 0.24 mmol) in DMF (8 mL). The mixture was stirred for 1 h, and then triethylamine (0.33 ml, 2.37 mmol) and O-benzylhydroxylamine (231 mg, 1.80 mmol) were added. The resulting mixture was stirred for 24 h at ambient temperature, and then water (50 mL) was added. The precipitates were collected, and dried to give the title compound (60 mg, 63%). 1H NMR (DMSO-d8) 6; 11.71 (s, 1H), 8.81 (s, 1H), 8.20 (s, 1H), 7.74 (s, 1H), 7.15-7.45 (m, 7H), 7.02 (m, 1H), 6.68 (s, 1H), 5.60 (s, 2H), 4.88 (s, 2H). HRMS calcd for C22H18F2N3O2 (M+H) 394.1367, found 394.1388.
  • Example 26 N-Benzyloxy-3-(4-fluorobenzyl)-3H-imidazo[4,5-c]pyridine-carboxamide
  • Figure US20080221154A1-20080911-C00053
  • (a) Methyl 3-(4-fluorobenzyl)-3H-imidazo[4,5-c]pyridine-6-carboxylate and methyl 1-(4-fluorobenzyl)-1H-imidazo[4,5-c]pyridine-6-carboxylate. The title compounds were prepared by alkylation of methyl 1H-imidazo[4,5-c]pyridine-6-carboxylate with 4-fluorobenzyl bromide under the same conditions as those in step (a) of example 1. The two isomers were separated by column chromatography using ethyl acetate as eluent and characterized by NOESY 1H NMR.
  • Methyl 3-(4-fluorobenzyl)-3H-imidazo[4,5-c]pyridine-6-carboxylate: 1H NMR (300 MHz, DMSO-d6) 6; 8.95 (s, 1H), 8.71 (s, 1H), 8.26 (s, 1H), 7.42-7.40 (m, 2H), 7.12-7.09 (m, 2H), 5.57 (s, 2H), 3.79 (s, 3H). LCMS (API-ES, M+H+): 286.1
  • Methyl 1-(4-fluorobenzyl)-1H-imidazo[4,5-c]pyridinecarboxylate: 1H NMR (300 MHz, DMSO-d6) δ; 8.96 (s, 1H), 8.67 (s, 1H), 8.31 (s, 1H), 7.35-7.33 (m, 2H), 7.14-7.08 (m, 2H), 5.57 (s, 2H), 3.79 (s, 3H). LCMS (API-ES, M+H+): 286.1.
  • (b) 3-(4-Fluorobenzyl)-3H-imidazo[4,5-c]pyridine-6-carboxylic acid. Methyl 3-(4-fluorobenzyl)-3H-imidazo[4,5-c]pyridinecarboxylate (1.30 g, 4.56 mmol) in 30 ml 1M LiOH in MeOH solution was stirred for 16 hours at ambient temperature. The mixture was concentrated to ⅓ of its volume in vacuo, and the pH of the concentrated solution was adjusted to 4-5 using 0.5 M hydrochloric acid. The precipitate that formed was collected by filtration and dried in vacuo to afford the title compound as a white powder (1.10 g, 88% yield). 1H NMR (300 MHz, MeOH-d4) δ; 8.73 (s, 1H), 8.56 (s, 1H), 8.39 (s, 1H), 7.36-7.34 (m, 2H), 7.07-7.02 (m, 2H), 5.57 (s, 2H). LCMS (API-ES, M+H+): 272.1.
  • (c) N-Benzyloxy-3-(4-fluorobenzyl)-3H-imidazo[4,5-c]pyridine-carboxamide. The title compound was prepared by coupling of 3-(4-fluorobenzyl)-3H-imidazo[4,5-c]pyridine-6-carboxylic acid and N-benzyloxyamine hydrochloride under the same conditions as those in step (c) of example 1. 1H NMR (300 MHz, MeOH-d4) δ; 8.70 (s, 1H), 8.53 (s, 1H), 8.31 (s, 1H), 7.46-7.28 (m, 7H), 7.07-7.05 (m, 2H), 5.56 (s, 2H), 4.92 (s, 2H). LCMS (API-ES, M+H+): 377.1. HRMS calcd for C21H18FN4O2 (M+H) 377.1444, found 377.1424. HPLC: >91% purity.
  • Example 27 3-(4-Fluorobenzyl)-N-methoxy-3H-imidazo[4,5-c]pyridine-6-carboxamide
  • Figure US20080221154A1-20080911-C00054
  • The title compound was prepared by coupling of 3-(4-fluorobenzyl)-3H-imidazo[4,5-c]pyridine-6-carboxylic acid and N-methoxyamine hydrochloride under the same conditions as those in step (c) of example 1. 1H NMR (300 MHz, MeOH-d4) δ; 8.71 (s, 1H), 8.53 (s, 1H), 8.32 (s, 1H), 7.36-7.33 (m, 2H), 7.07-7.05 (m, 2H), 5.57 (s, 2H), 3.75 (s, 3H). LCMS (API-ES, M+H+): 301.1. HRMS calcd for C11H14FN4O2 (M+H) 301.1101, found 301.1105. HPLC: >84% purity.
  • Example 28 34-Fluorobenzyl)-N-phenoxy-3H-imidazo[4,5]pyridine-6-carboxamide
  • Figure US20080221154A1-20080911-C00055
  • The title compound was prepared by coupling of 3-(4-fluoro-benzyl)-3H-imidazo[4,5-c]pyridine-6-carboxylic acid and N-phenoxyamine hydrochloride under the same conditions as those in step (c) of example 1. 1H NMR (300 MHz, MeOH-d4) δ; 8.82 (s, 1H), 8.53 (s, 1H), 8.43 (s, 1H), 8.24 (d, 2H, J=7.9 Hz), 7.38-7.33 (m, 2H), 7.07-7.01 (m, 2H), 6.88-6.74 (m, 3H), 5.57 (s, 2H). LCMS (API-ES, M+H+): 363.1. HRMS calcd for C20H16FN4O2 (M+H) 363.1257, found 363.1256. HPLC: >85% purity.
  • Example 29 3-(4-Fluorobenzyl)-N-[(pentafluorobenzyl)oxy]-3H-imidazo[4,5-c]pyridine-6-carboxamide
  • Figure US20080221154A1-20080911-C00056
  • The title compound was prepared by coupling of 3-(4-fluorobenzyl)-3H-imidazo[4,5-c]pyridine-6-carboxylic acid and N-[(2,3,4,5,6-pentafluorobenzyl)oxy]amine hydrochloride under the same conditions as those in step (c) of example 1. 1H NMR (300 MHz, MeOH-d4) δ: 8.69 (s, 1H), 8.52 (s, 1H), 8.28 (s, 1H), 7.33-7.32 (m, 2H), 7.07-7.02 (m, 2H), 5.56 (s, 2H), 5.09 (s, 2H). LCMS (API-ES, M+H+): 467.0. HRMS calcd for C21H13F6N4O2 (M+H) 467.0943, found 467.0942. HPLC: >80% purity.
  • Example 30 N-(Allyloxy)-3-(4-fluorobenzyl)-3H-imidazo[4,5-c]pyridine-6-carboxamide
  • Figure US20080221154A1-20080911-C00057
  • The title compound was prepared by coupling of 3-(4-fluorobenzyl)-3H-imidazo[4,5-c]pyridine-6-carboxylic acid and N-allyloxyamine hydrochloride under the same conditions as those in step (c) of example 1. 1H NMR (300 MHz, MeOH-d4) δ; 8.71 (s, 1H), 8.53 (s, 1H), 8.31 (s, 1H), 7.40-7.33 (m, 2H), 7.09-7.01 (m, 2H), 6.01-5.99 (m, 1H), 5.57 (s, 2H), 5.40-5.20 (m, 2H), 4.41 (d, 2H, J=6.0 Hz). LCMS (API-ES, M+H+): 327.0.1. HRMS calcd for C17H16FN4O2 (M+H) 327.1257, found 327.1248. HPLC: 100% purity.
  • Example 31 6-(2,4-Difluorobenzyl)-2-hydroxy-1,6-dihydrodipyrrolo[3,2-d:3′,4′-b]pyridin-3-(2H)-one
  • Figure US20080221154A1-20080911-C00058
  • (a) Methyl 1-{[4-benzyloxy)amino]methyl)}-1 phenylsulfonyl-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-c]pyridine-5-carboxylate. To a stirred solution of methyl 4-bromomethyl-1-phenylsulfonyl-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-c]pyridine-5-carboxylate (0.30 g, 0.73 mmol) [prepared acc. X. Doisy et al., Bioorg. Med. Chem. 1999, 7, 921-932] in DMF (20 mL) were added benzyloxyamine (0.45 g, 3.65 mmol) and triethylamine (0.51 mL, 3.65 mmol). The resulting mixture was stirred for 16 hours at ambient temperature. It was quenched with water (30 mL), and extracted with ethyl acetate (3×30 mL). The combined organic extracts were washed with water (2×30 mL), dried over sodium sulfate, concentrated in vacuo and purified by flash chromatography. Elution with hexane:ethyl acetate (1:1) provided the title compound as a solid (0.11 g, 33% yield). 1H NMR (CD3OD) δ: 9.14 (s, 1H), 8.04 (d, 2H, J=8.3 Hz), 7.98 (d, 1H, J=3.0 Hz), 7.53-7.68 (m, 3H), 7.34 (d, 2H, J=4.3 Hz), 7.13-7.15 (m, 2H), 7.05-7.07 (m, 2H), 6.98 (d, 1H, J=3.0 Hz), 4.47 (s, 2H), 4.46 (s, 2H), 3.90 (s, 3H). LCMS (API-ES, M+H+): 452.1.
  • (b) 2-Benzyloxy-1,6-dihydrodipyrrolo[3,2-d:3′,4′-b]pyridin-3(2H)-one.
  • To a stirred solution of methyl 1-{[4-benzyloxy)amino]methyl)}-1-phenylsulfonyl-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-c]pyridine-5-carboxylate (0.11 g, 0.24 mmol) in anhydrous methanol (10 mL) was added sodium ethoxide (0.18 mL, 21 wt % in ethanol, 0.48 mmol). The resulting mixture was stirred for 2 hours at ambient temperature. It was neutralized with excess acetic acid (0.1 mL). On addition of water, the product precipitated out. It was collected by filtration, washed with water and hexane, and dried in vacuo to give a light yellow solid (0.062 g, 91% yield). 1H NMR (DMSO-d6) δ: 12.16 (s, 1H), 8.86 (s, 1H), 7.80 (d, 1H, J=2.6 Hz), 7.52 (d, 2H, J=6.3 Hz), 7.40-7.42 (m, 3H), 6.67 (s, 1H), 5.13 (s, 2H), 4.75 (s, 2H). LCMS (API-ES, M+H+): 280.1.
  • (c) 2-Benzyloxy-6-(2,4-difluoro-benzyl)-1,6-dihydrodipyrrolo[3,2-d:3′,4′-b]pyridin-3(2H)-one. The title compound was prepared by alkylation of 2-benzyloxy-1,6-dihydrodipyrrolo[3,2-d:3′,4′-b]pyridin-3(2H)-one with 2,4-difluorobenzyl bromide in a manner similar to step (a) of example 1. 1H NMR (CD3OD) δ: 8.91 (s, 1H), 7.75 (d, 1H, J=3.0 Hz), 7.51-7.54 (m, 2H), 7.38-7.40 (m, 3H), 7.27-7.29 (m, 1H), 7.02-7.05 (m, 1H), 6.93-7.01 (m, 1H), 6.71 (d, 1H, J=3.0 Hz), 5.64 (s, 2H), 5.18 (s, 2H), 4.65 (s, 2H). LCMS (API-ES, M+H+): 406.1.
  • (d) 6-(2,4-Difluorobenzyl)-2-hydroxy-1,6-dihydrodipyrrolo[3,2-d:3′,4′-b]pyridin-3(2H)-one. To a stirred solution of 2-benzyloxy-(2,4-difluorobenzyl)-1,6-dihydrodipyrrolo[3,2-d:3′,4′-b]pyridin-3(2H)-one (0.050 g, 0.12 mmol) in anhydrous ethanol (15 mL) was added palladium hydroxide (5 mg, 20 wt % on carbon). The solution was stirred under a hydrogen atmosphere for 16 h. The catalyst was filtered off and the solution was concentrated until a product precipitated. The product was collected by filtration, washed with water and hexane. Repeated recrystallization from methanol provided the title compound as a light yellow solid (0.002 g, 5.1% yield). 1H NMR (CD3OD) δ: 8.90 (s, 1H), 7.76 (d, 1H, J=3.0 Hz), 7.25-7.29 (m, 1H), 6.99-7.02 (m, 1H), 6.93 (m, 1H), 6.77 (d, 1H, J=3.0 Hz), 5.64 (s, 2H), 5.18 (s, 2H), 4.60 (s, 2H). LCMS (API-ES, M+H+): 316.0. HRMS calcd for C16H12F2N3O2 (M+H) 316.0898, found 316.0897. HPLC: 100% purity.
  • Example 32 3-(2,3-Difluorobenzyl)-N-phenoxy-3H-imidazo[4,5-]pyridine-6-carboxamide
  • Figure US20080221154A1-20080911-C00059
  • The title compound can be prepared by coupling of 3-(2,3-difluorobenzyl)-3H-imidazo[4,5-c]pyridine-6-carboxylic acid and N-phenoxyamine under the same conditions as those in step (c) of example 1.
  • Example 33 3-(2,3-Difluorobenzyl)-N-methoxy-3H-imidazo[4,5-]pyridine-6-carboxamide
  • Figure US20080221154A1-20080911-C00060
  • The title compound can be prepared by coupling of 3-(2,3-difluorobenzyl)-3H-imidazo[4,5-c]pyridine-6-carboxylic acid and N-methoxyamine under the same conditions as those in step (c) of example 1.
  • Example 34 N-Allyloxy-3-(2,3-difluorobenzyl)-3H-imidazo[4,5-c]pyridine-6-carboxamide
  • Figure US20080221154A1-20080911-C00061
  • The title compound can be prepared by coupling of 3-(2,3-difluorobenzyl)-3H-imidazo[4,5-c]pyridine-6-carboxylic acid and N-allyloxyamine under the same conditions as those in step (c) of example 1.
  • Example 35 1-(4-Fluorobenzyl)-N-phenoxy-1H-imidazo[4,5-]pyridine-6-carboxamide
  • Figure US20080221154A1-20080911-C00062
  • The title compound can be prepared from 1-(4-fluoro-benzyl)-1H-imidazo[4,5-c]pyridine-6-carboxylic acid and N-phenoxyamine under the same conditions as those in step (c) of Example 1.
  • Example 36 N-tort-Butoxy-3-(2,3-difluorobenzyl)-3H-imidazo[4,5]pyridine-6-carboxamide
  • Figure US20080221154A1-20080911-C00063
  • The title compound can be prepared by coupling of 3-(2,3-difluorobenzyl)-3H-imidazo[4,5-c]pyridine-6-carboxylic acid and N-(tert-butoxy)amine under the same conditions as those in step (c) of Example 1.
  • Example 37 N-Methoxy-3-(3-methyl-butyl)-3H-imidazo[4,5-c]pyridine-6-carboxamide
  • Figure US20080221154A1-20080911-C00064
  • The title compound can be prepared by coupling of 3-(3-methyl-butyl)-3H-imidazo[4,5-c]pyridine-6-carboxylic acid [prepared by alkylation of methyl 1H-imidazo[4,5-c]pyridine-6-carboxylate with 1-bromo-3-methyl-butane in a manner similar to step (d) of example 16] and N-methoxyamine under the same conditions as those in step (c) of Example 1.
  • Example 38 3-(3-Methyl-butyl)-N-phenoxy-3H-imidazo[4,5-]pyridine-6-carboxamide
  • Figure US20080221154A1-20080911-C00065
  • The title compound can be prepared by coupling of 3-(3-methyl-butyl)-3H-imidazo[4,5-c]pyridine-6-carboxylic acid (prepared by alkylation of methyl 1H-imidazo[4,5-c]pyridine-6-carboxylic with 1-bromo-3-methyl-butane in a manner similar to step (d) of example 16) and N-phenoxyamine under the same conditions as those in step (c) of Example 1.
  • Example 39 3-(2-Cyclohexyl-ethyl)N-phenoxy-3H-imidazo[4,5-c]pyridine-6-carboxamide
  • Figure US20080221154A1-20080911-C00066
  • The title compound can be prepared by coupling of 3-(2-cyclohexyl-ethyl)-3H-imidazo[4,5-c]pyridine-6-carboxylic acid (prepared by alkylation of methyl 1H-imidazo[4,5-c]pyridine-6-carboxylate with 1-bromo-3-cyclohexyl ethane in a manner similar to step (d) of example 16) and N-phenoxyamine under the same conditions as those in step (c) of Example 1.
  • Example 40 3-(2-Cyclohexyl-ethyl)-N-methoxy-3H-imidazo[4,5-c]pyridine-6-carboxamide
  • Figure US20080221154A1-20080911-C00067
  • The title compound can be prepared by coupling of 3-(2-cyclohexyl-ethyl)-3H-imidazo[4,5-c]pyridine-6-carboxylic acid (prepared by alkylation of methyl 1H-imidazo[4,5-c]pyridine-6-carboxylate with 1-bromo-3-cyclohexyl ethane in a manner similar to step (d) of example 16) and N-methoxyamine under the same conditions as those in step (c) of Example 1.
  • Example 41 N-Allyloxy-3-(2-cyclohexyl-ethyl)-3H-imidazo[4,5-c]pyridine-6-carboxamide
  • Figure US20080221154A1-20080911-C00068
  • The title compound can be prepared by coupling of 3-(2-cyclohexyl-ethyl)-3H-imidazo[4,5-c]pyridine-6-carboxylic acid (prepared by alkylation of methyl 1H-imidazo[4,5-c]pyridine-carboxylate with 1-bromo-3-cyclohexyl ethane in a manner similar to step (d) of example 16) and N-allyloxyamine under the same conditions as those in step (c) of Example 1.
  • Example 42 1-(2,4-Difluorobenzyl)-N-hydroxy-4-methoxymethyl-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-c]pyridine-5-carboxamide
  • Figure US20080221154A1-20080911-C00069
  • The title compound can be prepared from methyl 4-methoxymethyl-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-c]pyridine-5-carboxylate (prepared according to X. Doisy et al., Bioorg. Med. Chem. 1999, 7, 921-932) and 2,4-difluorobenzyl bromide following the steps as described in Example 1.
  • Example 43 1-(2,4-Difluorobenzyl)-N-hydroxy-3-(2-phenylvinyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-c]pyridine-5-carboxamide
  • Figure US20080221154A1-20080911-C00070
  • The title compound can be prepared from ethyl 3-(2-phenylvinyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-c]pyridine-5-carboxylate (prepared according to X. Doisy et al., Bioorg. Med. Chem. 1999, 7, 921-932) and 2,4-difluorobenzyl bromide following the steps as described in Example 1.
  • Example 44 1-(2,4-difluorobenzyl)-N-hydroxy-3-(3-phenylprop-1-enyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-c]pyridine-5-carboxamide
  • Figure US20080221154A1-20080911-C00071
  • The title compound can be prepared from ethyl 3-(3-phenylprop-1-enyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-c]pyridine-5-carboxylate (prepared according to X. Doisy et al., Bioorg. Med. Chem. 1999, 7, 921-932) and 2,4-difluoro-benzyl bromide following the steps as described in Example 1.
  • Example 45 1-(2,4-difluorobenzyl)-N-hydroxy-3-(2-phenylethyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-c]pyridine-5-carboxamide
  • Figure US20080221154A1-20080911-C00072
  • The title compound can be prepared from ethyl 3-(2-phenylethyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-c]pyridine-5-carboxylate (prepared according to X. Doisy et al., Bioorg. Med. Chem. 1999, 7, 921-932) and 2,4-difluorobenzyl bromide following the steps as described in Example 1.
  • Example 46 1-(2,4-difluorobenzyl)-N-hydroxy-3-(3-phenylpropyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-c]pyridine-5-carboxamide
  • Figure US20080221154A1-20080911-C00073
  • The title compound can be prepared from ethyl 3-(3-phenyl-propyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-c]pyridine-5-carboxylate (prepared according to X. Doisy et al., Bioorg. Med. Chem. 1999, 7, 921-932) and 2,4-difluorobenzyl bromide following the steps as described in Example 1.
  • Example 47 1-(2,4-Difluorobenzyl)-N-hydroxy-3-{[(2-phenylethyl)oxy]methyl}-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-c]pyridine-5-carboxamide
  • Figure US20080221154A1-20080911-C00074
  • The title compound can be prepared from ethyl 3-[(2-phenylethoxy)methyl]-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-c]pyridine-5-carboxylate (prepared according to X. Doisy et al., Bioorg. Med. Chem. 1999, 7, 921-932) and 2,4-difluorobenzyl bromide following the steps as described in Example 1.
  • Example 48 1-(2,4-Difluorobenzyl)-N-hydroxy-3-{[(3-phenylallyl)oxy]methyl}-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-c]pyridine-5-carboxamide
  • Figure US20080221154A1-20080911-C00075
  • The title compound can be prepared from ethyl 3-{[(3-phenylallyl)oxy]methyl}-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-c]pyridine-5-carboxylate (prepared according to X. Doisy et al., Bioorg. Med. Chem. 1999, 7, 921-932) and 2,4-difluorobenzyl bromide following the steps as described in Example 1.
  • Example 49 1-(2,4-Difluorobenzyl)-N-hydroxy-3-methyl-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-c]pyridine-5-carboxamide
  • Figure US20080221154A1-20080911-C00076
  • The title compound can be prepared from ethyl 3-methyl-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-c]pyridine-5-carboxylate (prepared according to S. K. Singh et al., Heterocycles, 1997, 44, 379-391) and 2,4-difluorobenzyl bromide following the steps as described in Example 1.
  • Example 50 1-(2,4-Difluorobenzyl)-3-ethyl-N-hydroxy-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-c]pyridine 5-carboxamide
  • Figure US20080221154A1-20080911-C00077
  • The title compound can be prepared from ethyl 3-ethyl-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-c]pyridine-5-carboxylate (prepared according to S. K. Singh et al., Heterocycles, 1997, 44, 379-391) and 2,4-difluorobenzyl bromide following the steps as described in Example 1.
  • Example 51 3-Allyl-1-(2,4-difluorobenzyl)-N-hydroxy-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-c]pyridine-5-carboxamide
  • Figure US20080221154A1-20080911-C00078
  • The title compound can be prepared from ethyl 3-allyl-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-c]pyridine-5-carboxylate (prepared according to S. K. Singh et al., Heterocycles, 1997, 44, 379-391) and 2,4-difluorobenzyl bromide following the steps as described in Example 1.
  • Example 52 1-(2,4-Difluorobenzyl)-N-hydroxy-7-methyl-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-c]pyridine-5-carboxamide
  • Figure US20080221154A1-20080911-C00079
  • The title compound can be prepared from ethyl 7-methyl-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-c]pyridine-5-carboxylate (prepared according to J.-F. Rousseau, R. H. Dodd, J. Org. Chem. 1998, 63, 2731-2737) and 2,4-difluorobenzyl bromide following the steps as described in Example 1.
  • Example 53 Ethyl 1-(2,4-Difluorobenzyl)-5-hydroxycarbamoyl-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-q]pyridine-2-carboxylate
  • Figure US20080221154A1-20080911-C00080
  • (a) Ethyl 1-(2,4-difluorobenzyl)-5-formyl-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-c]pyridine-2-carboxylate. The title compound can be prepared by alkylation of ethyl 5-formyl-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-c]pyridine-2-carboxylate (prepared according to J.-F. Rousseau, R. H. Dodd, X. Doisy, P. Potier, Heterocycles 1989, 28, 1101-1113) and 2,4-difluorobenzyl bromide in a manner similar to step (a) in Example 1.
  • (b) 1-(2,4-Difluorobenzyl)-(2-ethoxycarbonyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-c]pyridine-5-carboxylic acid. The title compound can be prepared by oxidation of ethyl 1-(2,4-difluoro-benzyl)-5-formyl-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-c]pyridine-2-carboxylate according to the procedure by R. H. Dodd, M. Le Hyaric, Synthesis 1993, 295-287.
  • (c) Ethyl 1-(2,4-Difluorobenzyl)-5-hydroxycarbamoyl-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-c]pyridine-2-carboxylate. The title compound can be prepared from 1-(2,4-difluorobenzyl)-(2-ethoxycarbonyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-c]pyridine-5-carboxylic acid following in a manner similar to step (c) in Example 1.
  • Example 54 3-(2,4-Difluoro-phenoxymethyl)-1-ethyl-N-hydroxy-1H-pyrrolo[3,2-c]pyridine-6-carboxamide
  • Figure US20080221154A1-20080911-C00081
  • (a) Ethyl 1-ethyl-1H-pyrrolo[3,2-c]pyridine-6-carboxylate. A solution of 1-ethylpyrrole (1.20 g, 12.62 mmol), ethyl 3-dimethylamino-2-(dimethylamino-methyleneamino)-acrylate (3.2 g, 15.15 mmol) (prepared according to W. Kantlehner, F. Wagner, H. Bredereck, Liebigs Ann. Chem. 1980, 344-357) and trifluoroacetic acid (4.0 mL, 50.48 mmol) in acetic acid (20 mL) was stirred for 16 h at ambient temperature. Then the solution was heated in a SmithCreator™ (microwave reactor from Personal Chemistry) to 180° C. for 2 minutes. The reaction solution was poured into satd. potassium carbonate solution (600 mL), extracted with ethyl acetate (3×300 mL). The combined organic extracts were washed with brine (2×200 mL), dried over sodium sulfate, and concentrated. Purification by column chromatograph with ethyl acetate provided the title compound. (1.90 g, 70% yield). 1H NMR (CD3OD) δ; 8.85 (s, 1H), 8.30 (s, 1H), 7.61 (d, 1H, J=3.0 Hz), 6.76 (d, 1H, J=3.0 Hz), 4.30-4.48 (m, 4H), 1.41-1.50 (m, 6H). LCMS (API-ES, M+H+): 219.1.
  • (b) Ethyl 3-dimethylaminomethyl-1-ethyl-1H-pyrrolo[3,2-c]pyridine-6-carboxylate. The title compound was prepared from ethyl 1-ethyl-1H-pyrrolo[3,2-c]pyridinecarboxylate and N,N-dimethylmethylene ammonium iodide in a manner similar to step (a) of Example 12. 1H NMR(OMSO-d6) δ; 8.95 (s, 1H), 8.22 (s, 1H), 7.63 (s, 1H), 4.27-0.38 (m, 4H), 3.61 (s, 2H), 2.17 (s, 6H), 1.33-1.40 (m, 6H). MS (API-ES, M+H+): 276.0.
  • (c) Ethyl 3-acetoxymethyl-1 ethyl-1H-pyrrolo[3,2-]pyridine-6-carboxylate. The tale compound was prepared from ethyl 3-dimethylaminomethyl-1-ethyl-1H-pyrrolo[3,2-c]pyridine-6-carboxylate in a manner similar to step (b) of Example 12. 1H NMR (CD3OD) δ; 8.96 (s, 1H), 8.29 (s, 1H), 7.70 (s, 1H), 5.37 (s, 2H), 4.45 (q, 2H, J=7 Hz), 4.33 (q, 2H, J=7 Hz), 2.03 (s, 3H), 1.33-1.40 (m, 6H). MS (API-ES, M+H+): 291.0.
  • (d) Ethyl 3-hydroxymethyl-1-ethyl-1H-pyrrolo[3,2-c]pyridinecarboxylate. The title compound was prepared from ethyl 3-acetoxymethyl-1-ethyl-1H-pyrrolo[3,2-]pyridine-6-carboxylate in a manner similar to step (b) of Example 12. 1H NMR (CD3OD) δ; 8.97 (s, 1H), 8.28 (s, 1H), 7.58 (s, 1H), 4.85 (s, 2H), 4.45 (q, 2H, J=7 Hz), 4.32 (q, 2H, J=7 Hz), 1.33-1.40 (m, 6H). MS (API-ES, M+H+): 249.2.
  • (e) Ethyl 3-(2,4-difluoro-phenoxymethyl)-1-ethyl-1H-pyrrolo[3,2-c]pyridine-6-carboxylate and ethyl 3-(3,5-difluoro-2-hydroxybenzyl)-1-ethyl-1H-pyrrolo[3,2-c]pyridine-6-carboxylate. A solution of ethyl 3-hydroxymethyl-1-ethyl-1H-pyrrolo[3,2-c]pyridine-carboxylate (0.31 g, 1.25 mmol), 2,4-difluorophenol (0.12 mL, 1.25 mmol), diisopropylazodicarboxylate (0.25 mL, 1.25 mmol) and triphenylphosphine (0.33 g, 1.25 mmol) in THF (10 mL) was stirred for 16 h at ambient temperature. The reaction mixture was concentrated and purified by chromatograph to provide the title compounds as a mixture that was used without further purification in the next step. (0.25 g, 55% yield). LCMS (API-ES, M+H+): 361.1.
  • (f) 3-(2,4-Difluoro-phenoxymethyl)-1-ethyl-N-hydroxy-1H-pyrrolo[3,2-]pyridine-6-carboxamide. The title compound was prepared from the mixture of ethyl 3-(2,4-difluoro-phenoxymethyl)-1-ethyl-1H-pyrrolo[3,2-c]pyridine-carboxylate and ethyl 3-(3,5-difluoro-2-hydroxy-benzyl)-1-ethyl-1H-pyrrolo[3,2-c]pyridine-6-carboxylate in a manner similar to step (e) of example 11. Purification by HPLC provided the pure title compound.
  • 1H NMR (DMS-d6) 6; 11.18 (s, 1H), 8.87 (s, 1H), 8.78 (s, 1H), 8.06 (s, 1H), 7.71 (s, 1H), 7.29-7.31 (m, 1H), 7.14-7.18 (m, 1H), 6.93 (m, 1H), 5.31 (s, 2H), 4.24 (q, 2H, J=7.0 Hz), 1.28 (t, 3H, J=7.0 Hz). MS (API-ES, M+H+): 348.0. HRMS calcd for C17H18F2N3O3(M+H) 348.1160, found 348.1164. HPLC: 100% purity.
  • Example 55 3-(3,5-Difluoro-2-hydroxybenzyl)-1-ethyl-N-hydroxy-1H-pyrrolo[3,2-c]pyridine-6-carboxamide
  • Figure US20080221154A1-20080911-C00082
  • The title compound was prepared following the steps (a)-(f) in Example 55. The title compound was prepared from the mixture of ethyl 3-(2,4-difluoro-phenoxymethyl)-1-ethyl-1H-pyrrolo[3,2-c]pyridine-6-carboxylate and ethyl 3-(3,5-difluoro-2-hydroxy-benzyl)-1-ethyl-1H-pyrrolo[3,2-]pyridin-6-carboxylate in a manner similar to step (e) of example 11. Purification by HPLC provided the pure title compound. 1H NMR (DMSO-d6) δ: 11.19 (s, 1H), 9.60 (s, 1H), 8.94 (s, 1H), 8.75 (s, 1H), 8.07 (s, 1H), 7.45 (s, 1H), 7.03-7.04 (m, 1H), 6.83-6.86 (m, 1H), 4.30 (q, 2H, J=7.0 Hz), 4.10 (s, 2H), 1.34 (t, 3H, J=7.0 Hz). MS (API-ES, M+H+): 348.0. HRMS calcd for C17H16F2N3O3(M+H) 348.1160, found 348.1162. HPLC: 95% purity.
  • Example 56 3-(2-Chloro-4-fluoro-phenoxymethyl)-1-ethyl-N-hydroxy-1H-pyrrolo[3,2-c]pyridine-6-carboxamide
  • Figure US20080221154A1-20080911-C00083
  • (a) Ethyl 3-(2-chloro-4-fluoro-phenoxymethyl)-1-ethyl-1H-pyrrolo[3,2-c]pyridine-carboxylate and ethyl 3-(3-chloro-5-fluoro-2-hydroxy-benzyl)-1 ethyl-1H-pyrrolo[3,2-c]pyridine-6-carboxylate. The title compound can be prepared from ethyl 3-hydroxymethyl-1-ethyl-1H-pyrrolo[3,2-c]pyridinecarboxylate and 2-chloro-4-fluorophenol using methods similar to step (e) of Example 54.
  • (b) 3-(2-Chloro-4-fluoro-phenoxymethyl)-1-ethyl-N-hydroxy-1H-pyrrolo[3,2-c]pyridine-6-carboxamide. The title compound can be prepared from a mixture of ethyl 3-(2-chloro-4-fluoro-phenoxymethyl)-1-ethyl-1H-pyrrolo[3,2-c]pyridinecarboxylate and ethyl 3-(3-chloro-5-fluoro-2-hydroxy-benzyl)-1-ethyl-1H-pyrrolo[3,2-c]pyridine-6-carboxylate in a manner similar to step (e) of Example 11. Purification by HPLC can provide the pure title compound.
  • Example 57 3-(3-Chloro-5-fluoro-2-hydroxybenzyl)-1 ethyl-N-hydroxy-1H-pyrrolo[3,2-c]pyridine-6-carboxamide
  • Figure US20080221154A1-20080911-C00084
  • (a) Ethyl 3-(3-chloro-5-fluoro-2-hydroxybenzyl)-1-ethyl-1H-pyrrolo[3,2-c]pyridine-6-carboxylate. The title compound can be prepared from ethyl 3-hydroxymethyl-1-ethyl-1H-pyrrolo[3,2-c]pyridine-6-carboxylate and 2-chloro-4-fluorophenol using methods similar to that set forth in Example 55.
  • (b) 3-(3-Chloro-5-fluoro-2-hydroxybenzyl)-1-ethyl-N-hydroxy-1H-pyrrolo[3,2-c]pyridine-6-carboxamide. The title compound can be prepared from the mixture of ethyl 3-(2-chloro-4-fluoro-phenoxymethyl)-1-ethyl-1H-pyrrolo[3,2-c]pyridinecarboxylate and ethyl 3-(3-chloro-5-fluoro-2-hydroxy-benzyl)-1-ethyl-1H-pyrrolo[3,2-c]pyridine-6-carboxylate in a manner similar to step (e) of Example 11. Purification by HPLC can provide the pure title compound.
  • Example 58 3-(4-Fluoro-phenoxymethyl)-1-ethyl-N-hydroxy-1H-pyrrolo[3,2-c]pyridine-6-carboxamide
  • Figure US20080221154A1-20080911-C00085
  • (a) Ethyl 3-(4-fluoro-phenoxymethyl)-1-ethyl-1H-pyrrolo[3,2-c]pyridine-6-carboxylate. The title compound can be prepared from ethyl 3-hydroxymethyl-1-ethyl-1H-pyrrolo[3,2-c]pyridine-6-carboxylate and 4-fluorophenol using a methods similar to step (e) of Example 54.
  • (b) 3-(4-Fluoro-phenoxymethyl)-1-ethyl-N-hydroxy-1H-pyrrolo[3,2-c]pyridine-6-carboxamide. The title compound can be prepared from the mixture of ethyl 3-(4-fluoro-phenoxymethyl)-1-ethyl-1H-pyrrolo[3,2-c]pyridine-carboxylate and ethyl 3-(5-fluoro-2-hydroxy-benzyl)-1-ethyl-1H-pyrrolo[3,2-c]pyridine-6-carboxylate in a manner similar to step (e) of Example 11. Purification by HPLC can provide the pure title compound.
  • Example 59 3-(5-Fluoro-2-hydroxybenzyl)-1-ethyl-N-hydroxy-1H-pyrrolo[3,2-c]pyridine-6-carboxamide
  • Figure US20080221154A1-20080911-C00086
  • (a) Ethyl 3-(5-fluoro-2-hydroxybenzyl)-1-ethyl-1H-pyrrolo[3,2-c]pyridine-6-carboxylate. The title compound can be prepared from ethyl 3-hydroxymethyl-1-ethyl-1H-pyrrolo[3,2-c]pyridine-carboxylate and 4-fluorophenol using methods similar to that set forth in Example 55.
  • (b) 3-(5-Fluoro-2-hydroxybenzyl)-1-ethyl-N-hydroxy-1H-pyrrolo[3,2-q]pyridine-6-carboxamide. The title compound can be prepared from the mixture of ethyl 3-(4-fluoro-phenoxymethyl)-1-ethyl-1H-pyrrolo[3,2-c]pyridine-6-carboxylate and ethyl 3-(5-fluoro-2-hydroxy-benzyl)-1-ethyl-1H-pyrrolo[3,2-c]pyridine-6-carboxylate in a manner similar to step (e) of Example 11. Purification by HPLC can provide the pure title compound.
  • Example 60 1-Ethyl-N-hydroxy-3-(2,3,4-trifluoro-2-phenoxymethyl)-1H-pyrrolo[3,2-c]pyridine-6-carboxamide
  • Figure US20080221154A1-20080911-C00087
  • (a) Ethyl 3-(2,3,4-trifluoro-phenoxymethyl)-1-ethyl-1H-pyrrolo[3,2-c]pyridine-6-carboxylate. The title compound can be prepared from ethyl 3-hydroxymethyl-1-ethyl-1H-pyrrolo[3,2-c]pyridine-6-carboxylate and 2,3,4-trifluorophenol using methods similar to step (e) of Example 54.
  • (b) 1-Ethyl-N-hydroxy 3-(2,3,4-trifluoro-2-phenoxymethyl)-1H-pyrrolo[3,2-c]pyridine-6-carboxamide. The title compounds can be prepared from the mixture of ethyl 3-(3,3,4-trifluoro-phenoxymethyl-1-ethyl-1H-pyrrolo[3,2-c]pyridine-6-carboxylate and ethyl 3-(3,4,5-trifluoro-2-hydroxy-benzyl)-1-ethyl-1H-pyrrolo[3,2-c]pyridine-6-carboxylate in a manner similar to step (e) of Example 11. Purification by HPLC can provide the pure title compound.
  • Example 61 1-Ethyl-N-hydroxy 3-(3,4,5-trifluoro-2-hydroxybenzyl)-1H-pyrrolo[3,2-c]pyridine-6-carboxamide
  • Figure US20080221154A1-20080911-C00088
  • (a) Ethyl 3-(3,4,5-trifluoro-2-hydroxybenzyl)-1-ethyl-1H-pyrrolo[3,2-c]pyridine-6-carboxylate. The title compound can be prepared from ethyl 3-hydroxymethyl-1-ethyl-1H-pyrrolo[3,2-c]pyridine-carboxylate and 2,3,4-trifluorophenol using a methods similar to that set forth in Example 55.
  • (b) 1-Ethyl-N-hydroxy 3-(3,4,5-trifluoro-2-hydroxybenzyl)-1H-pyrrolo[3,2-c]pyridine-6-carboxamide. The title compound can be prepared from a mixture of ethyl 3-(3,3,4-trifluoro-phenoxymethyl)-1-ethyl-1H-pyrrolo[3,2-c]pyridine-carboxylate and ethyl 3-(3,4,5-trifluoro-2-hydroxy-benzyl)-1-ethyl-1H-pyrrolo[3,2-c]pyridine-carboxylate in a manner similar to step (e) of Example 11. Purification by HPLC can provide the pure title compound.
  • Example 62 3-(2-Chloro-phenoxymethyl)-1-ethyl-N-hydroxy-1H-pyrrolo[3,2-c]pyridine-6-carboxamide
  • Figure US20080221154A1-20080911-C00089
  • (a) Ethyl 3-(2-chloro-phenoxymethyl)-1-ethyl-1H-pyrrolo[3,2-c]pyridine-6-carboxylate. The title compound can be prepared from ethyl 3-hydroxymethyl-1-ethyl-1H-pyrrolo[3,2-c]pyridine-6-carboxylate and 4-chlorophenol using methods similar to step (e) of Example 54.
  • (b) 3-(2-Chloro-phenoxymethyl)-1-ethyl-N-hydroxy-1H-pyrrolo[3,2-c]pyridine-6-carboxamide. The title compound can be prepared from the mixture of ethyl 3-(4-chloro-phenoxymethyl)-1-ethyl-1H-pyrrolo[3,2-c]pyridine-6-carboxylate and ethyl 3-(5-chloro-2-hydroxy-benzyl)-1-ethyl-1H-pyrrolo[3,2-c]pyridine-6-carboxylate in a manner similar to step (e) of example 11. Purification by HPLC can provide the pure title compound.
  • Example 63 3-(5-Chloro-2-hydroxybenzyl)-1-ethyl-N-hydroxy-1H-pyrrolo[3,2-c]pyridine-6-carboxamide
  • Figure US20080221154A1-20080911-C00090
  • (a) Ethyl 3-(3-chloro-2-hydroxybenzyl)-1-ethyl-1H-pyrrolo[3,2-c]pyridine-6-carboxylate. The title compound can be prepared from ethyl 3-hydroxymethyl-ethyl-1H-pyrrolo[3,2-c]pyridine-6-carboxylate and 4-chlorophenol using a methods similar to that set forth in Example 55.
  • (b) 3-(5-Chloro-2-hydroxybenzyl)-1-ethyl-N-hydroxy-1H-pyrrolo[3,2-c]pyridine-6-carboxamide. The title compound can be prepared from the mixture of ethyl 3-(4-chloro-phenoxymethyl)-1-ethyl-1H-pyrrolo[3,2-]pyridine-6-carboxylate and ethyl 3-(5-chloro-2-hydroxy-benzyl)-ethyl-1H-pyrrolo[3,2-c]pyridine-6-carboxylate in a manner similar to step (e) of Example 11. Purification by HPLC can provide the pure title compound.
  • Example 64 Integrase Strand-Transfer Scintillation Proximity Assay
  • Oligonucleotides: Oligonucleotide #1-5′-(biotin) CCCCTTTTAGTCAGTGTGGAAAATCTCTAGCA-3′ (SEQ ID NO: 1) and oligonucleotide #2-5′-ACTGCTAGAGATTTTCCACACTGACTAAAG-3′ (SEQ ID NO: 2), were synthesized by TriLink BioTechnologies, Inc. (San Diego, Calif.). The annealed product represents preprocessed viral ds-DNA derived from the LTR U5 sequence of the viral genome. A ds-DNA control to test for non-specific interactions was made using a 3′ di-deoxy derivative of oligonucleotide #1 annealed to oligonucleotide #2. The CA overhang at the 5′ end of the non-biotinylated strand of the ds-DNA was created artificially by using a complimentary DNA oligonucleotide shortened by 2 base pairs. This configuration eliminates the requisite 3′ processing step of the integrase enzyme prior to the strand-transfer mechanism.
  • Host ds-DNA was prepared as an unlabeled and [3H]-thymidine labeled product from annealed oligonucleotide #3-5-AAAAAATGACCAAGGGCTAATTCACT-3′ (SEQ ID NO: 3), and oligonucleotide #4-5′-AAAAAAAGTGAATTAGCCCTTGGTCA-3′ (SEQ ID NO: 4), both synthesized by TriLink BioTechnologies, Inc. (San Diego, Calif.). The annealed product had overhanging 3′ ends of poly(dA). Host DNA was custom radiolabeled by PerkinElmer Life Sciences Inc. (Boston, Mass.) using an enzymatic method with a 12/1 ratio of [methyl-3H]dTTP/cold ds-DNA to yield 5′-blunt end ds-DNA with a specific activity of >900 Ci/mmol. The radiolabeled product was purified using a NENSORB cartridge and stored in stabilized aqueous solution (PerkinElmer). The final radiolabeled product had six [3H]-thymidine nucleotides at both 5′ ends of the host ds-DNA.
  • Reagents: Streptavidin-coated polyvinyltoluene (PVT) SPA beads were purchased from Amersham Pharmacia (Piscataway, N.J.). Cesium chloride was purchased from Shelton Scientific, Inc. (Shelton, Conn.). White polystyrene, flat bottom, non-binding surface 384-well plates were purchased from Corning. All other buffer components were purchased from Sigma (St. Louis, Mo.) unless otherwise indicated.
  • Enzyme Construction Full-length HIV-1 integrase (SF1) sequence (amino acids 1-288) (SEQ ID NO: 5) was constructed in a pET 15b vector (Novagen, Madison, Wis.) with mutations outlined by Chen et al. (Chen, C-H. J. et al., PNAS 97: 8233-8238 (2000)) that facilitate solubility of the enzyme and decrease oxidation. The vector contained a T7 promoter, a 6-histidine tag at the amino terminus, and a thrombin cleavage site. Mutations C56S, W131D, F139D, F185K, and C280S were introduced using a QuickChange kit (Stratagene, San Diego, Calif.). The construct was confirmed through DNA sequencing.
  • Enzyme Purification The penta-mutant was expressed in E. coli BL21 (DE3) cells and induced with 1 mM isopropyl-1 thio-β-D-galactopyranoside (IPTG) when cells reached an optical density between 0.8-1.0 at 600 nm. Cells were lysed in 20 mM HEPES (pH 7.5), 1.5 M NaCl, 5 mM imidazole, and 2 mM 2-mercaptoethanol. The enzyme was purified following standard methods for histidine tagged proteins (Jenkins, T. M. et al., Journal of Biological Chemistry 271: 7712-7718 (1996)). Specifically, cell lysate was passed over a Ni-Nta column (Qiagen, Chatsworth, Calif.) with the 6-His tagged integrase protein eluted by adding 250 mM imidazole. A G-25 Sepharose® column (Amersham Pharmacia, Piscataway, N.J.) was used to exchange the buffer prior to thrombin cleavage of the integrase protein and subsequent removal of thrombin using a benzamidine-Sepharose® 6B column. The cleaved 6-His tag was separated from the integrase using a second Ni-Nta column. The integrase was further purified with a heparin-Sepharose® column and a gradient of NaCl (0.4 to 1 M) in 20 mM HEPES (pH 7.5), 400 mM NaCl, and 1 mM DTT buffer. The purified protein was dialyzed against 20 mM HEPES (pH 7.5), 800 mM NaCl, and 1 mM DTT and concentrated by stirred cell ultrafiltration (Millipore, Bedford, Mass.) or Ultra-free spin concentrators (Millipore, Bedford, Mass.) when required.
  • Viral DNA Bead Preparation: Streptavidin-coated SPA beads were suspended to 20 mg/ml in 25 mM 3-morpholinopropanesulfonic acid (MOPS) (pH 7.2) and 0.1% NaN3. Biotinylated viral DNA was bound to the hydrated SPA beads in a batch process by combining 25 pmoles of ds-DNA to 1 mg of suspended SPA beads (10 μl of 50 μM viral DNA to 1 ml of 20 mg/ml SPA beads). The mixture was incubated at 22° C. for 20 min. with occasional mixing followed by centrifugation at about 2500 rpm for about 10 min. However, the centrifugation speed and time may vary depending upon the particular centrifuge and conditions. The supernatant was removed and the beads suspended to 20 mg/ml in 25 mM MOPS (pH 7.2) and 0.1% NaN3. The viral DNA beads were stable for more than 2 weeks when stored at 4° C. Di-deoxy viral DNA was prepared in an identical manner to yield control di-deoxy viral DNA beads.
  • Preparation of Integrase-DNA Complex: Assay buffer was made as a 10× stock of 250 mM MOPS (pH 7.2), 250 mM NaCl, 50 mM 3-[(3-cholamidopropyl)dimethylammonio]-1-propanesulfonate (CHAPS), 0.5% (octylphenoxy)polyethoxyethanol (NP40) (IGEPAL-CA) and 0.05% NaN3. Viral DNA beads were diluted to 2.67 mg/ml in 1× assay buffer plus 3 mM MgCl2, 1% DMSO, and 10 mM fresh DTT. Integrase (IN) was pre-complexed to viral DNA beads in a batch process (IN/viral DNA/bead complex) by combining diluted viral DNA beads with integrase at a concentration of 385 nM followed by a minimum incubation time of 15 min. at 22° C. The sample was kept at 22° C. until transferred to the assay wells. Long-term storage at 4° C. was possible, but not routinely applied.
  • Preparation of Host DNA: Host DNA was prepared to 200 nM as a mixture of unlabeled and [3H]T-labeled host DNA diluted in 1× assay buffer plus 8.5 mM MgCl2 and 15 mM DTT. Typical concentrations were about 10 nM to about 12 nM [3H]T-labeled host DNA and about 188 nM to about 190 nM unlabeled host DNA. The ratio was adjusted relative to enzyme activity and specific activity of the [3H]T-labeled host DNA to generate a SPA assay signal of 2000-3000 CPM in the absence of modulators such as inhibitors.
  • Strand-transfer Scintillation Proximity Assay: The strand-transfer reaction was carried out in 384-well microtiter plates, though an identical protocol can be used for a 96-well plate format with a final enzymatic reaction volume of 50 μl. Five microliters of compounds or test reagents diluted in 10% DMSO were added to the assay wells followed by the addition of 32.5 μl of the IN/viral-DNA/bead complex. The strand-transfer reaction was initiated by adding 12.5 μl of host DNA with vigorous vortexing of the plates and transferring them to a humidified 37° C. incubator. An incubation time of 50 min. was shown to be within the linear range of the enzymatic reaction in a 384-well plate. Reaction kinetics are faster in a 96-well format. An incubation time of 20 or 50 minutes was used as the time point to evaluate compound inhibitors for assays run in the 96- or 384-well plate format, respectively. The final concentrations of integrase and host DNA in the assay wells were 246 nM and 50 nM, respectively.
  • The integrase strand-transfer reaction was terminated by adding 35 μl of stop buffer (150 mM EDTA, 90 mM NaOH, and 6 M CsCl) to the wells. Components of the stop buffer function to terminate enzymatic activity (EDTA), dissociate integrase/DNA complexes in addition to separating non-integrated DNA strands (NaOH), and float the SPA beads to the surface of the wells to be in closer range to the PMT detectors of the TopCount® plate-based scintillation counter (PerkinElmer Life Sciences Inc. (Boston, Mass.)). After the addition of stop buffer, the plates were vigorously vortexed, sealed with transparent tape, and allowed to incubate a minimum of 60 min. at 22° C. The assay signal was measured using a TopCount® plate-based scintillation counter with settings optimal for [3H]-PVT SPA beads. The TopCount® program incorporated a quench standardization curve to normalize data for color absorption of the compounds (color quench correction program (QstINT file). Data values for quench-corrected counts per minute (QCPM) were used to quantify integrase activity. Counting time was 30 sec./well for plates processed in HTS mode, and up to 2 min./well for plates containing purified compound.
  • The di-deoxy viral DNA beads were used to optimize the integrase strand-transfer reaction. The di-deoxy termination of the viral ds-DNA sequence prevented productive integration of viral DNA into the host DNA by integrase. Thus, the assay signal in the presence of di-deoxy viral DNA was a measure of non-specific interactions. Assay parameters were optimized to where reactions with di-deoxy viral DNA beads gave an assay signal closely matched to the true background of the assay. The true background of the assay was defined as a reaction with all assay components (viral DNA and [3H]-host DNA) in the absence of integrase.
  • Determination of Compound Activity: Compounds were evaluated for integrase inhibitory activity using two different methods. A high-throughput screening method was employed to test combinatorial compound libraries or synthetic compounds that were solvated and transferred to microtiter plates. The percent inhibition of the compound was calculated using the equation (1−((QCPM sample−QCPM min)/(QCPM max−QCPM min)))*100. The min value is the assay signal in the presence of a known inhibitor at a concentration 100-fold higher than the IC50 for that compound. The min signal approximates the true background for the assay. The max value is the assay signal obtained for the integrase-mediated activity in the absence of compound.
  • The IC50 values of synthetic and purified combinatorial compounds were also determined. Compounds were prepared in 100% DMSO at 100-fold higher concentrations than desired for testing in assays, followed by dilution of the compounds in 100% DMSO to generate an 8-point titration curve with ½-log dilution intervals. The compound sample was further diluted 10-fold with water and transferred to the assay wells. The percentage inhibition for an inhibitory compound was determined as above with values applied to a nonlinear regression, sigmoidal dose response equation (variable slope) using GraphPad Prism curve fitting software (GraphPad Software, Inc., San Diego, Calif.).
  • Example 65 HIV-1 Cell Protection Assay
  • The antiviral activities of potential modulator compounds (test compounds) were determined in HIV-1 cell protection assays using the RF strain of HIV-1, CEM-SS cells, and the XTT dye reduction method (Weislow, O. S. et al., J. Natl. Cancer Inst. 81: 577-586 (1989)). Subject cells were infected with HIV-1 RF virus at an moi of 0.025 to 0.819 or mock infected with medium only and added at 2×104 cells per well into 96 well plates containing half-log dilutions of test compounds. Six days later, 50 μl of XTT (1 mg/ml XTT tetrazolium and 0.02 nM phenazine methosulfate) were added to the wells and the plates were reincubated for four hours. Viability, as determined by the amount of XTT formazan produced, was quantified spectrophotometrically by absorbance at 450 nm.
  • Data from CPE assays were expressed as the percent of formazan produced in compound-treated cells compared to formazan produced in wells of uninfected, compound-free cells. The fifty percent effective concentration (EC50) was calculated as the concentration of compound that affected an increase in the percentage of formazan production in infected, compound-treated cells to 50% of that produced by uninfected, compound-free cells. The 50% cytotoxicity concentration (CC50) was calculated as the concentration of compound that decreased the percentage of formazan produced in uninfected, compound-treated cells to 50% of that produced in uninfected, compound-free cells. The therapeutic index was calculated by dividing the cytotoxicity (CC50) by the antiviral activity (EC50).

Claims (18)

1. (canceled)
2. A method inhibiting or modulating an enzyme activity of HIV integrase, comprising contacting the enzyme with an effective amount of a compound represented by Formula I:
Figure US20080221154A1-20080911-C00091
wherein:
R1 is hydrogen or C(O)ORc, where Rc is an unsubstituted alkyl, unsubstituted alkenyl, or unsubstituted alkynyl;
R2 is hydrogen or an alkyl, alkenyl, or heteroalkyl, unsubstituted or substituted with one or more substituents independently selected from the group consisting of: —O—; NRdRd; —ORd, halogens; and an aryl group, unsubstituted or substituted with one or more substituents independently selected from the group consisting of: halogens; —C(Rd)3; unsubstituted alkyl; alkyl-Rd; alkenyl-Rd; and aryl groups,
where Rd is one or more substituents independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen; unsubstituted alkyl; unsubstituted alkenyl; and unsubstituted aryl groups;
R3 is hydrogen or an alkyl, alkenyl, or heteroalkyl group, unsubstituted or substituted with one or more substituents independently selected from the group consisting of: —O—; —ORe; and alkyl, aryl, cycloalkyl, and heteroaryl groups, unsubstituted or substituted with one or more substituents independently selected from the group consisting of: halogens; —OH; and aryl or heteroaryl groups, substituted with one or more Re substituents,
where Re is one or more substituents independently selected from the group consisting of halogens; hydrogen; OH; unsubstituted alkyl; and aryl unsubstituted or substituted with one or more substituents independently selected from the group consisting of halogen and alkyl;
R4 is hydrogen or an alkyl group, unsubstituted or substituted with —OR where Rf is an unsubstituted alkyl group;
R5 is hydrogen or an alkyl group;
R6 is hydrogen or an alkyl group, unsubstituted or substituted with an aryl group;
R4 and R6 together with the N to which R6 is attached cyclize to form the following compound represented by the Formula Id:
Figure US20080221154A1-20080911-C00092
wherein R12 and R13 are each independently hydrogen; and
n is 1;
R7 is hydrogen or an alkyl, alkenyl, or aryl group, unsubstituted or substituted with an aryl group, unsubstituted or substituted with one or more halogens:
X is C or N;
Y is C;
Z is C or N; and
there is a double bond between X and the 6-membered ring and Z and the 6-membered ring; or between X and Y; or between Y and Z;
or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.
3. A method according to claim 2, wherein said compound of Formula I is represented by Formula Ia:
Figure US20080221154A1-20080911-C00093
wherein:
X is N;
Y is C;
Z is C; and
the double bond is between Y and Z;
or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.
4. A method according to claim 2, wherein said compound of Formula I is represented by Formula Ib:
Figure US20080221154A1-20080911-C00094
wherein:
X is N;
Y is C;
Z is N; and
the double bond is between Y and Z;
or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.
5. A method according to claim 2, wherein said compound of Formula I is represented by Formula Ic:
Figure US20080221154A1-20080911-C00095
wherein:
X is C;
Y is C;
Z is N; and
the double bond is between X and Y;
or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.
6. A method according to claim 2, wherein said compound of Formula I is represented by Formula Ie:
Figure US20080221154A1-20080911-C00096
wherein:
X is N;
Y is C;
Z is N; and
the double bond is between X and Y;
or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.
7. A method according to claim 2, wherein for said compound represented by Formula I or pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof:
R1 is hydrogen or —C(O)O-ethyl;
R2 is hydrogen, methyl, ethyl, propyl, vinyl, allyl, or benzyl, unsubstituted or substituted with one or more substituents independently selected from the group consisting of: halogens, —O—, OH, amino, and phenyl, unsubstituted or substituted with one or more substituents selected from the group consisting of: methyl, ethyl, phenyl, benzyl, 2-phenylethyl, 3-phenylallyl, and 2-phenylvinyl;
R3 is methyl, ethyl, butyl, or benzyl, unsubstituted or substituted with one or more substituents independently selected from the group consisting of halogens, OH, methyl, cyclohexyl, —O—, thiadiazole, thiophenyl, and phenoxy, unsubstituted or substituted with one or more substituents independently selected from the group consisting of halogens, phenyl, and ethoxy,
R4 is hydrogen, methyl or methoxymethyl;
R5 is hydrogen or methyl;
R6 is hydrogen, methyl, or benzyl;
R7 is hydrogen, methyl, benzyl, phenyl, allyl, or tertbutyl, unsubstituted or substituted with one or more halogens; and
R4 and R6 together with the N to which R6 attaches cyclize to form a pyrrole-2-one.
8. A method according to claim 2, wherein for said compound represented by Formula I or pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof
R1 is hydrogen or —C(O)O-ethyl;
R2 is selected from hydrogen; hydroxymethyl; methoxymethyl; ethoxymethyl; 2-phenylvinyl; 3-phenylprop-1-enyl; [(2-phenylvinyl)oxy]methyl; dimethylaminomethyl; benzyloxymethyl; 4-fluorobenzyl; 2-phenylvinyl; 2-phenylethyl; 3-phenylpropyl; 2-phenylethoxymethyl; [(phenylprop-2-enyl)oxy]methyl; [(3-phenylallyl)oxy]methyl; methyl; ethyl; and allyl;
R3 is selected from hydrogen; 2,4-difluorobenzyl; 2,3-difluorobenzyl; 4-fluorobenzyl; 3-chloro-2,6-difluorobenzyl; 3-chloro-5-fluoro-2-hydroxybenzyl; 5-chloro-thiophen-2-ylmethyl; 3-chloro-2-fluorobenzyl; 2,3-dichlorobenzyl; 5-ethoxy-[1,2,3]thiadiazol-4-ylmethyl; 3-methyl-butyl: 2-cyclohexyl-ethyl; 2,4-difluoro-phenoxymethyl; 3,5-difluoro-2-hydroxybenzyl; 2-chloro-4-fluoro-phenoxymethyl; 3-chloro-5-fluoro-2-hydroxybenzyl; 4-fluoro-phenoxymethyl; 5-fluoro-2-hydroxy-benzyl; 2,3,4-trifluoro-phenoxymethyl; 3,4,5-trifluoro-2-hydroxybenzyl; 2-chloro-phenoxymethyl; and 5-chloro-2-hydroxy-benzyl;
R4 is hydrogen, methyl or methoxymethyl;
R5 is hydrogen or methyl;
R6 is hydrogen, methyl, or benzyl;
R7 is hydrogen, methyl, benzyl, phenyl, pentafluorobenzyl, allyl, tert-butyl;
R4 and R6 together with the N to which R attaches cyclize to form a pyrrol-2-one.
9. A method according to claim 2, wherein said compound of Formula I is selected from the group consisting of:
1-(2,4-Difluorobenzyl)-N-hydroxy-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-c]pyridine-5-carboxamide;
1-(2,4-Difluorobenzyl)-N-hydroxy-N-methyl-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-c]pyridine-5-carboxamide;
1-(4-Fluorobenzyl)-N-hydroxy-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-c]pyridine-5-carboxamide;
1-(4-Fluorobenzyl)-N-hydroxy-N-methyl-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-c]pyridine-5-carboxamide;
N-Benzyl-1-(4-fluorobenzyl)-N-hydroxy-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-c]pyridine-5-carboxamide;
1-(3-Chloro-2,6-difluorobenzyl)-N-hydroxy-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-c]pyridine-5-carboxamide;
1-(5-Chloro-thiophen-2-ylmethyl)-N-hydroxy-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-c]pyridine-5-carboxamide;
1-(3-Chloro-2-fluorobenzyl)-N-hydroxy-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-c]pyridine-5-carboxamide;
1-(2,3-Dichlorobenzyl)-N-hydroxy-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-c]pyridine-5-carboxamide;
1-(5-Ethoxy-[1,2,3]thiadiazol-4-ylmethyl)-N-hydroxy-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-c]pyridine-5-carboxamide;
1-(2,4-Difluorobenzyl)-N-hydroxy-4-methyl-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-c]pyridine-5-carboxamide;
1-(2,4-Difluorobenzyl)-3-ethoxymethyl-N-hydroxy-1H-pyrrolo[2,3]pyridine-5-carboxamide;
1-(2,4-Difluorobenzyl)-N-hydroxy-3-hydroxymethyl-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-c]pyridine-5-carboxamide,
1-(2,4-Difluorobenzyl-3-dimethylaminomethyl-N-hydroxy-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-c]pyridine-5-carboxamide;
3-Benzyloxymethyl-1-(2,4-difluorobenzyl)-N-hydroxy-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-c]pyridine-5-carboxamide;
3-(2,4-Difluorobenzyl)-N-hydroxy-3H-imidazo[4,5-c]pyridine-carboxamide;
1-(2,4-Difluorobenzyl)-N-hydroxy-1H-imidazo[4,5-c]pyridine-6-carboxamide;
1-(2,4-Difluorobenzyl)-3-ethoxymethyl-N-hydroxy-N-methyl-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-c]pyridine-5-carboxamide;
1-(2,4-Difluorobenzyl)-N-hydroxy-3-hydroxymethyl-N-methyl-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-c]pyridine-5-carboxamide;
1-(2,4-Difluorobenzyl)-3-dimethylaminomethyl-N-hydroxy-N-methyl-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-c]pyridine-5-carboxamide;
1-(2,4-Difluorobenzyl)-N-methoxy-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-c]pyridine-5-carboxamide;
1-(2,4-Difluorobenzyl)-3-ethoxymethyl-N-methoxy-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-c]pyridine-5-carboxamide;
1-(2,4-Difluorobenzyl)-3-hydroxymethyl-N-methoxy-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-c]pyridine-5-carboxamide;
1-(2,4-Difluorobenzyl)-3-dimethylaminomethyl-N-methoxy-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-c]pyridine-5-carboxamide;
N-Benzyloxy-1-(2,4-difluorobenzyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-c]pyridine-5-carboxamide;
N-Benzyloxy-3-(4-fluorobenzyl)-3H-imidazo[4,5-c]pyridine-6-carboxamide;
3-(4-Fluorobenzyl)-N-methoxy-3H-imidazo[4,5-c]pyridine-6-carboxamide;
3-(4-Fluorobenzyl)-N-phenoxy-3H-imidazo[4,5-c]pyridine-6-carboxamide;
3-(4-Fluorobenzyl)-N-[(pentafluorobenzyl)oxy]-3H-imidazo[4,5-c]pyridine-6-carboxamide;
N-(Allyloxy)-3-(4-fluorobenzyl)-3H-imidazo[4,5-c]pyridine-6-carboxamide;
6-(2,4-Difluorobenzyl)-2-hydroxy-1,6-dihydrodipyrrolo[3,2-d:3′,4′-b]pyridin-3(2H-one;
3-(2,3-Difluorobenzyl)-N-phenoxy-3H-imidazo[4,5-c]pyridine-6-carboxamide;
3-(2,3-Difluorobenzyl)-N-methoxy-3H-imidazo[4,5-c]pyridine-6-carboxamide;
N-Allyloxy-3-(2,3-difluorobenzyl)-3H-imidazo[4,5-c]pyridine-6-carboxamide;
1-(4-Fluorobenzyl)-N-phenoxy-1H-imidazo[4,5-c]pyridine-6-carboxamide;
N-tert-Butoxy-3-(2,3-difluorobenzyl)-3H-imidazo[4,5-c]pyridine-6-carboxamide;
N-Methoxy-3-(3-methyl-butyl)-3H-imidazo[4,5-c]pyridine-6-carboxamide;
3-(3-Methyl-butyl)-N-phenoxy-3H-imidazo[4,5-c]pyridine-6-carboxamide;
3-(2-Cyclohexyl-ethyl)-N-phenoxy-3H-imidazo[4,5-c]pyridine-6-carboxamide;
3-(2-Cyclohexyl-ethyl)-N-methoxy-3H-imidazo[4,5-c]pyridine-6-carboxamide;
N-Allyloxy-3-(2-cyclohexyl-ethyl)-3H-imidazo[4,5-c]pyridin-6-carboxamide;
1-(2,4-Difluorobenzyl)-N-hydroxy-4-methoxymethyl-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-c]pyridine-5-carboxamide;
1-(2,4-Difluorobenzyl)-N-hydroxy-3-(2-phenylvinyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-c]pyridine-5-carboxamide;
1-(2,4-Difluorobenzyl)-N-hydroxy-3-(3-phenylprop-1-enyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-c]pyridine-5-carboxamide;
1-(2,4-Difluorobenzyl)-N-hydroxy-3-(2-phenylethyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-c]pyridine-5-carboxamide;
1-(2,4-Difluorobenzyl)-N-hydroxy-3-phenylpropyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-c]pyridine-5-carboxamide;
1-(2,4-Difluorobenzyl)-N-hydroxy-3-{[(2-phenylethyl)oxy]methyl}-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-c]pyridine-5-carboxamide;
1-(2,4-Difluorobenzyl)-N-hydroxy-3-{[(3-phenylallyl)oxy]methyl}-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-c]pyridine-5-carboxamide;
1-(2,4-Difluorobenzyl)-N-hydroxy-3-methyl-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-c]pyridine-5-carboxamide;
1-(2,4-Difluorobenzyl)-3-ethyl-N-hydroxy-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-c]pyridin-5-carboxamide;
3-Allyl-1-(2,4-difluorobenzyl)-N-hydroxy-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-c]pyridine-5-carboxamide;
1-(2,4-Difluorobenzyl)-N-hydroxy-7-methyl-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-c]pyridine-5-carboxamide;
Ethyl 1-(2,4-Difluorobenzyl)-5-hydroxycarbamoyl-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-c]pyridine-2-carboxylate;
3-(2,4-Difluoro-phenoxymethyl)-1-ethyl-N-hydroxy-1H-pyrrolo[3,2-c]pyridine-6-carboxamide;
3-(3,5-Difluoro-2-hydroxybenzyl)-1-ethyl-N-hydroxy-1H-pyrrolo[3,2-]pyridine-6-carboxamide;
3-(2-chloro-4-fluoro-phenoxymethyl)-1-ethyl-N-hydroxy-1H-pyrrolo[3,2-c]pyridine-carboxamide;
3-(3-Chloro-5-fluoro-2-hydroxybenzyl)-1-ethyl-N-hydroxy-1H-pyrrolo[3,2-c]pyridine-6-carboxamide;
1-Ethyl-3-(4-fluoro-phenoxymethyl)-N-hydroxy-1H-pyrrolo[3,2-c]pyridine-6-carboxamide;
1-Ethyl-3-(5-fluoro-2-hydroxybenzyl)-N-hydroxy-1H-pyrrolo[3,2-c]pyridine-6-carboxamide;
1-Ethyl-N-hydroxy-3-(2,3,4-trifluoro-2-phenoxymethyl)-1H-pyrrolo[3,2-c]pyridine-6-carboxamide;
1-Ethyl-N-hydroxy-3-(3,4,5-trifluoro-2-hydroxybenzyl)-1H-pyrrolo[3,2-c]pyridine-6-carboxamide;
3-(2-Chloro-phenoxymethyl)-1-ethyl-N-hydroxy-1H-pyrrolo[3,2-]pyridine-6-carboxamide;
3-(5-Chloro-2-hydroxy-benzyl)-ethyl-N-hydroxy-1H-pyrrolo[3,2-c]pyridine-6-carboxamide; or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.
10. A method treating a disease or condition mediated by HIV, comprising administering to a mammal in need of such treatment a therapeutically effective amount of at least one compound represented by Formula I:
Figure US20080221154A1-20080911-C00097
wherein:
R1 is hydrogen or C(O)ORc, where Rc is an unsubstituted alkyl, unsubstituted alkenyl, or unsubstituted alkynyl;
R2 is hydrogen or an alkyl, alkenyl, or heteroalkyl, unsubstituted or substituted with one or more substituents independently selected from the group consisting of:
—O—; NRdRd; —ORd; halogens; and an aryl group, unsubstituted or substituted with one or more substituents independently selected from the group consisting of
halogens; —C(Rd)3; unsubstituted alkyl; alkyl-Rd; alkenyl-Rd; and aryl groups, where Rd is one or more substituents independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen; unsubstituted alkyl; unsubstituted alkenyl; and unsubstituted aryl groups;
R3 is hydrogen or an alkyl, alkenyl, or heteroalkyl group, unsubstituted or substituted with one or more substituents independently selected from the group consisting of
—O—; —ORd; and alkyl, aryl, cycloalkyl, and heteroaryl groups, unsubstituted or substituted with one or more substituents independently selected from the group consisting of:
halogens; —OH; and aryl or heteroaryl groups, substituted with one or more Re substituents,
where Re is one or more substituents independently selected from the group consisting of halogens; hydrogen; OH; unsubstituted alkyl; and aryl unsubstituted or substituted with one or more substituents independently selected from the group consisting of halogen and alkyl:
R4 is hydrogen or an alkyl group, unsubstituted or substituted with —ORf where Rf is an unsubstituted alkyl group;
R5 is hydrogen or an alkyl group;
R6 is hydrogen or an alkyl group, unsubstituted or substituted with an aryl group;
R4 and R6 together with the N to which R6 is attached cyclize to form the following compound represented by the Formula Id:
Figure US20080221154A1-20080911-C00098
wherein R12 and R13 are each independently hydrogen; and
n is 1;
R7 is hydrogen or an alkyl, alkenyl, or aryl group, unsubstituted or substituted with an aryl group, unsubstituted or substituted with one or more halogens;
X is C or N;
Y is C;
Z is C or N; and
there is a double bond between X and the 6-membered ring and Z and the 6-membered ring; or between X and Y; or between Y and Z;
or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.
11. A method according to claim 10, wherein said compound of Formula I is represented by Formula Ia:
Figure US20080221154A1-20080911-C00099
wherein:
X is N;
Y is C;
Z is C; and
the double bond is between Y and Z;
or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.
12. A method according to claim 10, wherein said compound of Formula I is represented by Formula Ib:
Figure US20080221154A1-20080911-C00100
wherein:
X is N;
Y is C;
Z is N; and
the double bond is between Y and Z;
or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.
13. A method according to claim 10, wherein said compound of Formula I is represented by Formula Ic:
Figure US20080221154A1-20080911-C00101
wherein:
X is C;
Y is C;
Z is N; and
the double bond is between X and Y;
or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.
14. A method according to claim 10, wherein said compound of Formula I is represented by Formula Ie:
Figure US20080221154A1-20080911-C00102
wherein:
X is N;
Y is C;
Z is N; and
the double bond is between X and Y;
or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.
15. A method according to claim 10, wherein for said compound represented by Formula I or pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof
R1 is hydrogen or —C(O)O-ethyl;
R2 is hydrogen, methyl, ethyl, propyl, vinyl, allyl, or benzyl, unsubstituted or substituted with one or more substituents independently selected from the group consisting of halogens, —O—, OH, amino, and phenyl, unsubstituted or substituted with one or more substituents selected from the group consisting of: methyl, ethyl, phenyl, benzyl, 2-phenylethyl, 3-phenylallyl, and 2-phenylvinyl;
R3 is methyl, ethyl, butyl, or benzyl, unsubstituted or substituted with one or more substituents independently selected from the group consisting of halogens, OH, methyl, cyclohexyl, —O—, thiadiazole, thiophenyl, and phenoxy, unsubstituted or substituted with one or more substituents independently selected from the group consisting of: halogens, phenyl, and ethoxy;
R4 is hydrogen, methyl or methoxymethyl;
R5 is hydrogen or methyl;
R6 is hydrogen, methyl, or benzyl;
R7 is hydrogen, methyl, benzyl, phenyl, allyl, or tert-butyl, unsubstituted or substituted with one or more halogens; and
R4 and R6 together with the N to which R6 attaches cyclize to form a pyrrole-2-one.
16. A method according to claim 10, wherein for said compound represented by Formula I or pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof
R1 is hydrogen or —C(O)O-ethyl;
R2 is selected from hydrogen; hydroxymethyl; methoxymethyl; ethoxymethyl; 2-phenylvinyl; 3-phenylprop-1-enyl; [(2-phenylvinyl)oxy]methyl; dimethylaminomethyl; benzyloxymethyl; 4-fluorobenzyl; 2-phenylvinyl; 2-phenylethyl; 3-phenylpropyl; 2-phenylethoxymethyl; [(phenylprop-2-enyl)oxy]methyl; [(3-phenylallyl)oxy]methyl; methyl; ethyl; and allyl;
R3 is selected from hydrogen; 2,4-difluorobenzyl; 2,3-difluorobenzyl; 4-fluorobenzyl; 3-chloro-2,6-difluorobenzyl; 3-chloro-5-fluoro-2-hydroxybenzyl; 5-chloro-thiophen-2-ylmethyl; 3-chloro-2-fluorobenzyl; 2,3-dichlorobenzyl; 5-ethoxy-[1,2,3]thiadiazol-4-ylmethyl; 3-methyl-butyl; 2-cyclohexyl-ethyl; 2,4-difluoro-phenoxymethyl; 3,5-difluoro-2-hydroxybenzyl; 2-chloro-4-fluoro-phenoxymethyl: 3-chloro-5-fluoro-2-hydroxybenzyl; 4-fluoro-phenoxymethyl; 5-fluoro-2-hydroxy-benzyl; 2,3,4-trifluoro-phenoxymethyl; 3,4,5-trifluoro-2-hydroxybenzyl; 2-chloro-phenoxymethyl; and 5-chloro-2-hydroxy-benzyl;
R4 is hydrogen, methyl or methoxymethyl;
R5 is hydrogen or methyl;
R6 is hydrogen, methyl, or benzyl;
R7 is hydrogen, methyl, benzyl, phenyl, pentafluorobenzyl, allyl, tert-butyl;
R4 and R6 together with the N to which R6 attaches cyclize to form a pyrrol-2-one.
17. A method according to claim 10, wherein said compound of Formula I is selected from the group consisting of:
1-(2,4-Difluorobenzyl)-N-hydroxy-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-c]pyridine-5-carboxamide;
1-(2,4-Difluorobenzyl)-N-hydroxy-N-methyl-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-c]pyridine-5-carboxamide;
1-(4-Fluorobenzyl)-N-hydroxy-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-c]pyridine-5-carboxamide;
1-(4-Fluorobenzyl)-N-hydroxy-N-methyl-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-c]pyridine-5-carboxamide;
N-Benzyl-1-(4-fluorobenzyl)-N-hydroxy-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-c]pyridine-5-carboxamide;
1-(3-Chloro-2,6-difluorobenzyl)-N-hydroxy-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-c]pyridine-5-carboxamide;
1-(5-Chloro-thiophen-2-ylmethyl)-N-hydroxy-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-c]pyridine-5-carboxamide;
1-(3-Chloro-2-fluorobenzyl)-N-hydroxy-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-c]pyridine-5-carboxamide;
1-(2,3-Dichlorobenzyl)-N-hydroxy-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-c]pyridine-5-carboxamide;
1-(5-Ethoxy-[1,2,3]thiadiazol-4-ylmethyl)-N-hydroxy-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-c]pyridine-5-carboxamide;
1-(2,4-Difluorobenzyl)-N-hydroxy-4-methyl-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-c]pyridine-5-carboxamide;
1-(2,4-Difluorobenzyl)-3-ethoxymethyl-N-hydroxy-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-c]pyridine-5-carboxamide;
1-(2,4-Difluorobenzyl)-N-hydroxy-3-hydroxymethyl-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-c]pyridine-5-carboxamide;
1-(2,4-Difluorobenzyl)-3-dimethylaminomethyl-N-hydroxy-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-c]pyridine-5-carboxamide;
3-Benzyloxymethyl-1-(2,4-difluorobenzyl)-N-hydroxy-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-c]pyridine-5-carboxamide;
3-(2,4-Difluorobenzyl)-N-hydroxy-3H-imidazo[4,5-c]pyridine-6-carboxamide;
1-(2,4-Difluorobenzyl)-N-hydroxy-1H-imidazo[4,5-c]pyridine-6-carboxamide;
1-(2,4-Difluorobenzyl)-3-ethoxymethyl-N-hydroxy-N-methyl-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-c]pyridine-5-carboxamide;
1-(2,4-Difluorobenzyl)-N-hydroxy-3-hydroxymethyl-N-methyl-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-c]pyridine-5-carboxamide;
1-(2,4-Difluorobenzyl-3-dimethylaminomethyl-N-hydroxy-N-methyl-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-c]pyridine-5-carboxamide;
1-(2,4-Difluorobenzyl)-N-methoxy-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-c]pyridine-5-carboxamide;
1-(2,4-Difluorobenzyl)-3-ethoxymethyl-N-methoxy-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-c]pyridine-5-carboxamide;
1-(2,4-Difluorobenzyl)-hydroxymethyl-N-methoxy-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-c]pyridine-5-carboxamide;
1-(2,4-Difluorobenzyl)-3-dimethylaminomethyl-N-methoxy-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-c]pyridine-5-carboxamide;
N-Benzyloxy-1-(2,4-difluorobenzyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-c]pyridine-5-carboxamide;
N-Benzyloxy-3-(4-fluorobenzyl)-3H-imidazo[4,5-c]pyridine-6-carboxamide;
3-(4-Fluorobenzyl)-N-methoxy-3H-imidazo[4,5-c]pyridine-6-carboxamide;
3-(4-Fluorobenzyl)-N-phenoxy-3H-imidazo[4,5-c]pyridine-6-carboxamide;
3-(4-Fluorobenzyl)-N-[pentafluorobenzyl)oxy]-3H-imidazo[4,5-c]pyridine-6-carboxamide;
N-(Allyloxy)-3-(4-fluorobenzyl)-3H-imidazo[4,5-c]pyridine-6-carboxamide;
6-(2,4-Difluorobenzyl)-2-hydroxy-1,6-dihydrodipyrrolo[3,2-d:3′,4′-b]pyridin-3(2H)-one;
3-(2,3-Difluorobenzyl)-N-phenoxy-3H-imidazo[4,5-c]pyridine-6-carboxamide;
3-(2,3-Difluorobenzyl)-N-methoxy-3H-imidazo[4,5-c]pyridine-6-carboxamide;
N-Allyloxy-3-(2,3-difluorobenzyl)-3H-imidazo[4,5-c]pyridine-6-carboxamide;
1-(4-Fluorobenzyl)-N-phenoxy-1H-imidazo[4,5-c]pyridine-6-carboxamide;
N-tert-Butoxy-3-(2,3-difluorobenzyl)-3H-imidazo[4,5-c]pyridine-6-carboxamide;
N-Methoxy-3-(3-methyl-butyl)-3H-imidazo[4,5-c]pyridine-6-carboxamide;
3-(3-Methyl-butyl)-N-phenoxy-3H-imidazo[4,5-c]pyridine-6-carboxamide;
3-(2-Cyclohexyl-ethyl)-N-phenoxy-3H-imidazo[4,5-c]pyridine-6-carboxamide;
3-(2-Cyclohexyl-ethyl)-N-methoxy-3H-imidazo[4,5-c]pyridine-6-carboxamide;
N-Allyloxy-3-(2-cyclohexyl-ethyl)-3H-imidazo[4,5-c]pyridine-6-carboxamide;
1-(2,4-Difluorobenzyl)-N-hydroxy-4-methoxymethyl-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-c]pyridine-5-carboxamide;
1-(2,4-Difluorobenzyl)-N-hydroxy-3-(2-phenylvinyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-c]pyridine-5-carboxamide;
1-(2,4-Difluorobenzyl-N-hydroxy-3-(3-phenylprop-1-enyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-c]pyridine-5-carboxamide;
1-(2,4-Difluorobenzyl)-N-hydroxy-3-(2-phenylethyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-c]pyridine-5-carboxamide;
1-(2,4-Difluorobenzyl)-N-hydroxy-3-(3-phenylpropyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-c]pyridine-5-carboxamide;
1-(2,4-Difluorobenzyl)-N-hydroxy-3-[(2-phenylethyl)oxy]methyl)-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-c]pyridine-5-carboxamide;
1-(2,4-Difluorobenzyl)-N-hydroxy-3{[(3-phenylallyl)oxy]methyl}-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-c]pyridine-5-carboxamide;
1-(2,4-Difluorobenzyl)-N-hydroxy-3-methyl-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-c]pyridine-5-carboxamide;
1-(2,4-Difluorobenzyl)-3-ethyl-N-hydroxy-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-c]pyridine-5-carboxamide;
3-Allyl-1-(2,4-difluorobenzyl)-N-hydroxy-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-c]pyridine-carboxamide;
1-(2,4-Difluorobenzyl)-N-hydroxy-7-methyl-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-c]pyridine-5-carboxamide;
Ethyl 1-(2,4-Difluorobenzyl)-5-hydroxycarbamoyl-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-c]pyridine-2-carboxylate;
3-(2,4-Difluoro-phenoxymethyl)-1-ethyl-N-hydroxy-1H-pyrrolo[3,2-c]pyridine-6-carboxamide;
3-(3,5-Difluoro-2-hydroxybenzyl)-1-ethyl-N-hydroxy-1H-pyrrolo[3,2-c]pyridine-6-carboxamide;
3-(2-Chloro-4-fluoro-phenoxymethyl)-1-ethyl-N-hydroxy-1H-pyrrolo[3,2-c]pyridine-6-carboxamide;
3-(3-Chloro-5-fluoro-2-hydroxybenzyl)-1-ethyl-N-hydroxy-1H-pyrrolo[3,2-c]pyridine-carboxamide;
1-Ethyl-3-(4-fluoro-phenoxymethyl)-N-hydroxy-1H-pyrrolo[3,2-c]pyridine-carboxamide;
1-Ethyl-3-(5-fluoro-2-hydroxybenzyl)-N-hydroxy-1H-pyrrolo[3,2-c]pyridine-6-carboxamide;
1-Ethyl-N-hydroxy-3-(2,3,4-trifluoro-2-phenoxymethyl)-1H-pyrrolo[3,2-c]pyridine-6-carboxamide;
1-Ethyl-N-hydroxy-3-(3,4,5-trifluoro-2-hydroxybenzyl)-1H-pyrrolo[3,2-c]pyridine-6-carboxamide;
3-(2-Chloro-phenoxymethyl)-1-ethyl-N-hydroxy-1H-pyrrolo[3,2-c]pyridine-carboxamide;
3-(5-Chloro-2-hydroxy-benzyl)-1-ethyl-N-hydroxy-1H-pyrrolo[3,2-c]pyridine-6-carboxamide; or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.
18. A method of evaluating the HIV integrase modulatory activity of a test compound, comprising:
a) immobilizing viral DNA on a surface, wherein the viral DNA has been modified to contain a CA base pair overhang at the 5′ end;
b) adding integrase to the immobilized DNA;
c) adding a test compound to the immobilized viral DNA/integrase mixture;
d) obtaining target DNA radiolabeled at both 3′ ends of the ds-DNA
e) combining the immobilized viral DNA/integrase/compound mixture with the radiolabeled target DNA to initiate a reaction;
f) stopping the reaction by adding a stop buffer to the combination of (e); and
g) reading the assay results in a scintillation counter to determine whether the test compound modulates the activity of the integrase.
US12/043,636 2002-10-31 2008-03-06 Hiv-integrase inhibitors, pharmaceutical compositions, and methods for their use Abandoned US20080221154A1 (en)

Priority Applications (1)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
US12/043,636 US20080221154A1 (en) 2002-10-31 2008-03-06 Hiv-integrase inhibitors, pharmaceutical compositions, and methods for their use

Applications Claiming Priority (4)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
US42251302P 2002-10-31 2002-10-31
US10/699,068 US7135482B2 (en) 2002-10-31 2003-10-30 HIV-integrase inhibitors, pharmaceutical compositions, and methods for their use
US11/470,301 US7368571B2 (en) 2002-10-31 2006-09-06 HIV-Integrase inhibitors, pharmaceutical compositions and methods for their use
US12/043,636 US20080221154A1 (en) 2002-10-31 2008-03-06 Hiv-integrase inhibitors, pharmaceutical compositions, and methods for their use

Related Parent Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
US11/470,301 Continuation US7368571B2 (en) 2002-10-31 2006-09-06 HIV-Integrase inhibitors, pharmaceutical compositions and methods for their use

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
US20080221154A1 true US20080221154A1 (en) 2008-09-11

Family

ID=32230367

Family Applications (3)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
US10/699,068 Expired - Fee Related US7135482B2 (en) 2002-10-31 2003-10-30 HIV-integrase inhibitors, pharmaceutical compositions, and methods for their use
US11/470,301 Expired - Fee Related US7368571B2 (en) 2002-10-31 2006-09-06 HIV-Integrase inhibitors, pharmaceutical compositions and methods for their use
US12/043,636 Abandoned US20080221154A1 (en) 2002-10-31 2008-03-06 Hiv-integrase inhibitors, pharmaceutical compositions, and methods for their use

Family Applications Before (2)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
US10/699,068 Expired - Fee Related US7135482B2 (en) 2002-10-31 2003-10-30 HIV-integrase inhibitors, pharmaceutical compositions, and methods for their use
US11/470,301 Expired - Fee Related US7368571B2 (en) 2002-10-31 2006-09-06 HIV-Integrase inhibitors, pharmaceutical compositions and methods for their use

Country Status (16)

Country Link
US (3) US7135482B2 (en)
EP (1) EP1558611B1 (en)
JP (1) JP2006506398A (en)
AR (1) AR041864A1 (en)
AT (1) ATE454385T1 (en)
AU (1) AU2003269421A1 (en)
BR (1) BR0315820A (en)
CA (1) CA2500487A1 (en)
DE (1) DE60330890D1 (en)
GT (1) GT200300231A (en)
MX (1) MXPA05004343A (en)
NL (1) NL1024676C2 (en)
PA (1) PA8586801A1 (en)
TW (1) TW200424199A (en)
UY (1) UY28048A1 (en)
WO (1) WO2004039803A2 (en)

Cited By (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2013082476A1 (en) 2011-11-30 2013-06-06 Emory University Antiviral jak inhibitors useful in treating or preventing retroviral and other viral infections

Families Citing this family (18)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
PA8586801A1 (en) 2002-10-31 2005-02-04 Pfizer HIV-INTEGRESS INHIBITORS, PHARMACEUTICAL COMPOSITIONS AND METHODS FOR USE
CA2513141A1 (en) 2003-01-27 2004-08-12 Pfizer Inc. Hiv-integrase inhibitors, pharmaceutical compositions, and methods for their use
MXPA06012342A (en) * 2004-04-26 2007-01-17 Pfizer Inhibitors of the hiv integrase enzyme.
WO2005103003A2 (en) * 2004-04-26 2005-11-03 Pfizer Inc. Pyrrolopyridine derivatives and their use as hiv-integrase inhibitors
EP1873155A1 (en) * 2004-04-26 2008-01-02 Pfizer Inc. Inhibitors of the HIV integrase enzyme
EP1802619A1 (en) * 2004-09-07 2007-07-04 Pfizer, Inc. Inhibitors of the hiv integrase enzyme
US7745459B2 (en) 2004-09-21 2010-06-29 Japan Tobacco Inc. Quinolizinone compound and use thereof as HIV integrase inhibitor
DE102005015005A1 (en) * 2005-04-01 2006-10-05 Qiagen Gmbh Process for treating a sample containing biomolecules
JP4982482B2 (en) * 2005-05-10 2012-07-25 メルク・シャープ・エンド・ドーム・コーポレイション HIV integrase inhibitor
US20090170846A1 (en) * 2005-10-03 2009-07-02 Pfizer Inc Inhibitors of the hiv integrase enzyme
EA200800758A1 (en) * 2005-10-07 2008-08-29 Пфайзер Продактс Инк. ENZYME INTEGRASE INHIBITORS HIV
US20080079207A1 (en) * 2006-09-28 2008-04-03 Williams Controils Industries, Inc. Methods and apparatus for a lever control
RU2010153656A (en) * 2008-06-04 2012-07-20 Амбрилиа Байофарма Инк. (Ca) Pyridoxine HIV Integrase Inhibitors
GB0908394D0 (en) 2009-05-15 2009-06-24 Univ Leuven Kath Novel viral replication inhibitors
GB0913636D0 (en) 2009-08-05 2009-09-16 Univ Leuven Kath Novel viral replication inhibitors
US20120316161A1 (en) * 2009-12-23 2012-12-13 Katholieke Universiteit Leuven Novel antiviral compounds
EP2640705A2 (en) 2010-11-15 2013-09-25 Katholieke Universiteit Leuven Novel antiviral compounds
GB201321735D0 (en) * 2013-12-09 2014-01-22 Ucb Pharma Sa Therapeutic Agents

Citations (10)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US4371536A (en) * 1979-08-29 1983-02-01 A/S Ferrosan β-Carbolin-3-carboxylic acid derivatives
US5616609A (en) * 1991-08-08 1997-04-01 Ikekawa; Tetsuro Carcinostatic compound and production thereof
US5726203A (en) * 1993-07-19 1998-03-10 Li; Zelin Qinghaosu derivatives against AIDS
US6057297A (en) * 1996-08-06 2000-05-02 Polifarma S.P.A. Inhibitor compounds of zinc-dependent metalloproteinases associated with pathological conditions, and therapeutic use thereof
US6075021A (en) * 1996-10-08 2000-06-13 Synthelabo 1H-pyrido[3,4-b]indole-4-carboxamide derivatives, preparation and application thereof in therapeutics
US6395743B1 (en) * 1999-10-13 2002-05-28 Merck & Co., Inc. HIV integrase inhibitors
US6403347B1 (en) * 1998-02-03 2002-06-11 Merck & Co., Inc. HIV integrase inhibitors
US20020123527A1 (en) * 2000-06-16 2002-09-05 Walker Michael A. HIV integrase inhibitors
US7001912B2 (en) * 2003-01-27 2006-02-21 Agouron Pharmaceuticals, Inc. HIV-integrase inhibitors, pharmaceutical compositions, and methods for their use
US7135482B2 (en) * 2002-10-31 2006-11-14 Agouron Pharmaceuticals, Inc. HIV-integrase inhibitors, pharmaceutical compositions, and methods for their use

Family Cites Families (27)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
GB8720125D0 (en) 1987-08-26 1987-09-30 Roussel Lab Ltd Chemical compounds
GB2271566A (en) * 1992-10-14 1994-04-20 Merck & Co Inc HIV integrase inhibitors
US5262537A (en) * 1993-03-19 1993-11-16 Anaquest, Inc. Derivatives of 4,5,6,7-tetrahydroimidazo-[4,5-c]pyridinyl-6-carboxylic acid
GB2306476A (en) * 1995-10-27 1997-05-07 Merck & Co Inc Hiv integrase inhibitors
AU4917397A (en) * 1996-10-31 1998-05-22 Merck & Co., Inc. Benzodiazepine hydrazide derivatives as inhibitors of hiv integrase
GB2327674A (en) * 1997-07-29 1999-02-03 Merck & Co Inc HIV integrase inhibitors
CA2335339A1 (en) 1998-06-12 1999-12-16 Societe De Conseils De Recherches Et D'applications Scientifiques (S.C.R .beta.-carboline compounds
WO2000068235A1 (en) * 1999-05-12 2000-11-16 The Government Of The United States Of America, As Represented By The Secretary, Department Of Health & Human Services, The National Institutes Of Health Thiazepine inhibitors of hiv-1 integrase
US6245806B1 (en) * 1999-08-03 2001-06-12 Merck & Co., Inc. HIV integrase inhibitors
EP1209158A1 (en) 2000-11-18 2002-05-29 Aventis Pharma Deutschland GmbH Substituted beta-carbolines
WO2002002516A2 (en) * 2000-06-30 2002-01-10 Thomas Jefferson University Inhibitors of hiv integrase
HUP0400175A2 (en) 2001-03-01 2007-07-30 Shionogi & Co Nitrogen-containing heteroaryl compounds having hiv integrase inhibitory activity, their use and pharmaceutical compositions containing them
JP4176477B2 (en) * 2001-03-01 2008-11-05 塩野義製薬株式会社 Nitrogen-containing aromatic heterocyclic derivatives having HIV integrase inhibitory activity
JP2003171381A (en) 2001-09-25 2003-06-20 Takeda Chem Ind Ltd Entry inhibitory agent
JP2003119137A (en) 2001-10-10 2003-04-23 Japan Tobacco Inc Hiv inhibitor
WO2003033496A1 (en) 2001-10-19 2003-04-24 Transtech Pharma, Inc. Beta-carbolin derivatives as ptp-inhibitors
AU2002334205B2 (en) 2001-10-26 2007-07-05 Istituto Di Ricerche Di Biologia Molecolara P. Angeletti Spa Dihydroxypyrimidine carboxamide inhibitors of HIV integrase
AU2002349675A1 (en) 2001-12-05 2003-06-17 Shionogi And Co., Ltd. Derivative having hiv integrase inhibitory activity
JP2005515206A (en) 2001-12-12 2005-05-26 ブリストル−マイヤーズ スクイブ カンパニー HIV integrase inhibitor
DE60315796T2 (en) 2002-01-17 2008-06-05 Merck & Co., Inc. HYDROXYNAPHTHYRIDINONCARBOXYL ACID AMIDES SUFFICIENT AS INHIBITORS OF THE HIV INTEGRASE
WO2003077857A2 (en) 2002-03-15 2003-09-25 Merck & Co., Inc. N-(substituted benzyl)-8-hydroxy-1,6-naphthyridine-7- carboxamides useful as hiv integrase inhibitors
AU2003215469A1 (en) * 2002-03-28 2003-10-13 Procyon Biopharma Inc. Pyridoxal-5-phosphate derivatives as hiv integrase inhibitors
WO2003086319A2 (en) * 2002-04-10 2003-10-23 Merck & Co., Inc. Pharmaceutical compositions containing an hiv integrase inhibitor and a nonionic surfactant
AU2002335027A1 (en) 2002-10-15 2004-05-04 Chiron Corporation Treatment of tnf-alpha-mediated disorders with casein kinase i epsilon inhibitors
WO2005103003A2 (en) 2004-04-26 2005-11-03 Pfizer Inc. Pyrrolopyridine derivatives and their use as hiv-integrase inhibitors
MXPA06012342A (en) 2004-04-26 2007-01-17 Pfizer Inhibitors of the hiv integrase enzyme.
EP1802619A1 (en) 2004-09-07 2007-07-04 Pfizer, Inc. Inhibitors of the hiv integrase enzyme

Patent Citations (12)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US4371536A (en) * 1979-08-29 1983-02-01 A/S Ferrosan β-Carbolin-3-carboxylic acid derivatives
US5010077A (en) * 1979-08-29 1991-04-23 A/S Ferrosan β-carbolin-3-carboxylic acid derivatives useful for treating anxiety and related disorders
US5616609A (en) * 1991-08-08 1997-04-01 Ikekawa; Tetsuro Carcinostatic compound and production thereof
US5726203A (en) * 1993-07-19 1998-03-10 Li; Zelin Qinghaosu derivatives against AIDS
US6057297A (en) * 1996-08-06 2000-05-02 Polifarma S.P.A. Inhibitor compounds of zinc-dependent metalloproteinases associated with pathological conditions, and therapeutic use thereof
US6075021A (en) * 1996-10-08 2000-06-13 Synthelabo 1H-pyrido[3,4-b]indole-4-carboxamide derivatives, preparation and application thereof in therapeutics
US6403347B1 (en) * 1998-02-03 2002-06-11 Merck & Co., Inc. HIV integrase inhibitors
US6395743B1 (en) * 1999-10-13 2002-05-28 Merck & Co., Inc. HIV integrase inhibitors
US20020123527A1 (en) * 2000-06-16 2002-09-05 Walker Michael A. HIV integrase inhibitors
US7135482B2 (en) * 2002-10-31 2006-11-14 Agouron Pharmaceuticals, Inc. HIV-integrase inhibitors, pharmaceutical compositions, and methods for their use
US7001912B2 (en) * 2003-01-27 2006-02-21 Agouron Pharmaceuticals, Inc. HIV-integrase inhibitors, pharmaceutical compositions, and methods for their use
US7138408B2 (en) * 2003-01-27 2006-11-21 Agouron Pharmaceuticals, Inc. HIV integrase inhibitors, pharmaceutical compositions and methods for their use

Cited By (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2013082476A1 (en) 2011-11-30 2013-06-06 Emory University Antiviral jak inhibitors useful in treating or preventing retroviral and other viral infections
EP3750544A2 (en) 2011-11-30 2020-12-16 Emory University Jak inhibitors for use in the prevention or treatment of viral infection

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
WO2004039803A2 (en) 2004-05-13
EP1558611A2 (en) 2005-08-03
GT200300231A (en) 2004-06-23
AR041864A1 (en) 2005-06-01
PA8586801A1 (en) 2005-02-04
UY28048A1 (en) 2004-05-31
CA2500487A1 (en) 2004-05-13
AU2003269421A1 (en) 2004-05-25
WO2004039803A3 (en) 2004-09-16
BR0315820A (en) 2005-09-13
NL1024676C2 (en) 2005-12-14
EP1558611B1 (en) 2010-01-06
AU2003269421A8 (en) 2004-05-25
US7368571B2 (en) 2008-05-06
US20070004768A1 (en) 2007-01-04
ATE454385T1 (en) 2010-01-15
DE60330890D1 (en) 2010-02-25
US20040147547A1 (en) 2004-07-29
US7135482B2 (en) 2006-11-14
MXPA05004343A (en) 2005-08-03
TW200424199A (en) 2004-11-16
NL1024676A1 (en) 2004-05-06
JP2006506398A (en) 2006-02-23

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
US7368571B2 (en) HIV-Integrase inhibitors, pharmaceutical compositions and methods for their use
US7138408B2 (en) HIV integrase inhibitors, pharmaceutical compositions and methods for their use
US7468375B2 (en) Inhibitors of the HIV integrase enzyme
US7053216B2 (en) Modulators of Rho C activity
FI77450C (en) FOERFARANDE FOER FRAMSTAELLNING AV PIPERAZINYLSUBSTITUERADE KARBOSTYRILDERIVAT, VILKA AER ANVAENDBARA SOM KARDIOTONISKA MEDEL.
US7365066B2 (en) Pyrazolopyridine derivatives as pharmaceutical agents
US10000500B2 (en) Coelenterazine analogues
US20110112079A1 (en) Phosphodiesterase inhibitors
SK3542002A3 (en) Pteridinones as kinase inhibitors
US7781453B2 (en) Aminopyridine-derivatives
US7138399B2 (en) Alkoxypyridine-derivatives
US8058283B2 (en) 7H-pyrido[3,4-D]pyrimidin-8-ones, their manufacture and use as protein kinase inhibitors
US7943634B2 (en) Substituted benzo[4,5]furo[3,2-c]pyridine derivatives as PDE 4 inhibitors
US20080108652A1 (en) Imidazo (4,5-B) pyridine-derivatives as inducible no-synthase inhibitors
EP1751157B1 (en) Inhibitors of the hiv integrase enzyme
EP4157844A1 (en) 4-(7h-pyrrolo[2,3-d]pyrimidin-4-yl)-3,6-dihydropyridine-1-(2h)-carboxamide derivatives as limk and/or rock kinases inhibitors for use in the treatment of cancer
US20090170846A1 (en) Inhibitors of the hiv integrase enzyme

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
STCB Information on status: application discontinuation

Free format text: ABANDONED -- FAILURE TO RESPOND TO AN OFFICE ACTION